Ricoh M022 Service Manual Download Page 203

Page: 203 / 1152

Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor

1. Left cover ( p.146)
2. Open the drum securing plate ( p.192 "PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)").

3. Inner left front cover [A] ( x 1)

4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2,

x 2)

Image Creation

201

CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA

Summary of Contents for M022

Page 1: ...M022 M024 M026 M028 SERVICE MANUAL DRAFT VERSION Please subscribe to this Content ID number for future updates to this document CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 2: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 3: ... described the CE Safety Guide Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine Before Installation Maintenance Shipping and Moving the Machine Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine If the machine is heavy two or more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries muscle strains spinal injuries etc or damage to the machine if it is dropped or t...

Page 4: ...check the operation of the machine to make sure that it is operating normally This ensures that all shipping materials protective materials wires and tags metal brackets etc removed for installation have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal operation Never use your fingers to check moving parts c...

Page 5: ...avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous Switch the machine off unplug it and allow it to cool before doing preventive maintenance To avoid fire or explosion never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to contamination of food drinks etc which could cause illness Clean the floor completely after accid...

Page 6: ...e sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency Make sure that the power cord is grounded earthed at the power source with the ground wire on the plug Connect the power cord directly into the power source Never use an extension cord When you disconnect the power plug from the power source always pull on the plug not...

Page 7: ...e product is necessary 3 the product cover has been damaged Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine They should never allow paper clips staples or any other small metallic objects to fall into the machine Special Safety Instructions for Toner Accidental Physical Exposure Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling t...

Page 8: ...oner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items Safety Instructions for this Machine Prevention of Physical Injury 1 Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals make sure that the machine and periphera...

Page 9: ...einstalledandmaintainedbyacustomerservicerepresentative who has completed the training course on those models 2 The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one The manufacturer recommends replacing theentireNVRAM Donotrechargeorburnthisbattery UsedNVRAMmustbehandledinaccordance with local regulations...

Page 10: ...ble in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure WARNING Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the proced...

Page 11: ...tion in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks...

Page 12: ...9 1 Product Information Specifications 23 Machine Configuration 24 Machine Configuration 24 Overview 25 Component Layout 25 Paper Path 26 Drive Layout 30 2 Installation Installation Requirements 33 Environment 33 Machine Level 34 Machine Space Requirements 34 Machine Dimensions 35 Power Requirements 35 Optional Unit Combinations 37 Machine Options 37 Controller Options 37 Fax Options 38 Other Opti...

Page 13: ...Installation Procedure 81 1 Bin Tray Unit M370 86 Component Check 86 Installation Procedure 87 Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 93 Installation Procedure 93 Copy Data Security Unit B829 95 Installation 95 Tray Heater Mainframe 97 Installation Procedure 97 Tray Heater Optional Unit 98 Component Check 98 Installation Procedure 98 Controller Options 111 Overview 111 SD Card Appli Move 112 File Fo...

Page 14: ...ustment Beforehand 131 Special Tools 132 Image Adjustment 133 Scanning 133 ARDF 134 Registration 135 Erase Margin Adjustment 137 Color Registration 137 Printer Gamma Correction 138 Exterior Covers 144 Toner Collection Bottle 144 Front Door 145 Left Cover 146 Rear Lower Cover 147 Rear Cover 147 Dust Filter 148 Exhaust Filter 149 Right Rear Cover 149 Operation Panel 150 Touch Panel Position Adjustme...

Page 15: ... Laser Unit 184 Ventilation fan 190 Image Creation 192 PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 192 PCU and Development Unit 194 Toner Supply Motor 197 Toner Collection Motor 199 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor 201 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor 202 RFID CPU Board 202 RFID Board 203 Toner Supply Fan 203 Image Transfer 205 ITB Image Transfer Belt Unit 205 Image Transfer Belt ITB Cleaning Unit 207 IT...

Page 16: ...ket 235 Registration Motor 237 Duplex By pass Motor 237 Paper Feed Motor 238 Vertical Transport Motor 239 Drum Phase Sensor CMY 241 Drum Phase Sensor K 242 Inverter Motor 243 Drive Unit Fan 244 Fusing 245 Fusing Unit Maintenance Parts 245 Fusing Unit 245 Cleaning Unit 246 Oil Supply Roller 247 Cleaning Roller 248 Plain Shaft Bearing 248 Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 249 Pressure Roller 252 Heating R...

Page 17: ...ensor 274 Paper Lift Sensor 275 Paper End Sensor 276 Paper Feed Sensor 277 Tray Lift Motor 278 Paper Size Switch 279 Cleaning the Paper Dust Container 279 Paper Exit 281 Paper Exit Unit 281 Paper Exit Sensor 285 Paper Overflow Sensor 285 Fusing Exit Sensor 286 Duplex Unit 289 Duplex Unit 289 By pass Tray Unit 290 Duplex Entrance Sensor 292 Duplex Exit Sensor 293 Inverter Sensor 294 Fusing Entrance...

Page 18: ...r Sensor 309 Feed Motor 311 Feed Clutch 313 Transport Motor 313 Registration Sensor 315 Inverter Sensor 316 Cooling Fan 318 Internal Finisher 320 Internal Finisher 320 Output Tray Unit 322 Stapler Unit 323 Gathering Roller Motor 323 Paper Exit Motor 324 Shift Roller Motor 325 Transport Motor 326 Tray Lift Motor 326 Jogger Motor 328 Exit Guide Plate Motor 331 Shift Roller HP Sensor 331 Gathering Ro...

Page 19: ...Controller Fan 351 BCU 352 NVRAM EEPROM Replacement Procedure 356 IPU 357 PSU Box 358 PSU 359 HVPS T1T2 Board 360 HVPS CB Board 361 SDB 362 5 System Maintenance Service Program Mode 365 SP Tables 365 Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode 365 Types of SP Modes 365 Remarks 368 Main SP Tables 1 370 SP1 XXX Feed 370 Main SP Tables 2 389 SP2 XXX Drum 389 Main SP Tables 3 416 SP3 XXX Process 416 1...

Page 20: ...8 Firmware Update 611 Type of Firmware 611 Before You Begin 612 Updating Firmware 613 Update Procedure for App2Me Provider 615 Browser Unit Update Procedure 617 Handling Firmware Update Errors 618 Installing Another Language 620 Reboot System Setting Reset 623 Software Reset 623 System Settings and Copy Setting Reset 623 Controller Self Diagnostics 625 Overview 625 Downloading Stamp Data 627 NVRAM...

Page 21: ...Tables 643 Service Call Conditions 643 SC1xx Scanning 646 SC 2xx Exposure 650 SC3xx Image Processing 1 654 SC3xx Image Processing 2 655 SC4xx Image Processing 3 658 SC5xx Paper Feed and Fusing 662 SC6xx Device Communication 673 SC7xx Peripherals 683 SC8xx Overall System 687 SC9xx Miscellaneous 699 Process Control Error Conditions 704 Developer Initialization Result 704 Process Control Self Check R...

Page 22: ...ar Streaks 721 Ghosting 721 Unfused or Partially Fused Prints 722 Image Skew 722 Background Stain 723 No Printing on Paper Edge 723 Image not centered when it should be 723 Jam Detection 724 Paper Jam Display 724 Jam Codes and Display Codes 724 Electrical Component Defects 729 Sensors 729 Blown Fuse Conditions 734 Scanner Test Mode 735 SBU Test Mode 735 7 Energy Saving Energy Save 737 Energy Saver...

Page 23: ...INDEX 743 21 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 24: ...22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 25: ...Product Information Specifications See Appendices for the following information Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Software Accessories Optional Equipment 23 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 26: ...69 1 bin Tray M370 Fax Option D483 01 NA D483 02 EU D483 03 AA Memory Unit Type B G578 17 SAF memory Requires the Fax Option Browser Unit D430 05 NA D430 06 EU D430 07 AA In SD card slot 2 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11a g D377 01 NA D377 02 EU AA I F slot A File Format Converter D377 04 I F slot B Gigabit Ethernet D377 21 I F slot C Copy Data Security Unit B829 07 Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 1...

Page 27: ...Overview Component Layout Overview 25 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 28: ...r Transfer roller 10 PCU Photo Conductor Unit 11 Development Unit 12 Standard Paper Feed Tray Tray 1 13 Polygon Mirror Motor 14 LDU 15 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit Paper Path Standard model Basic A Standard Paper Feed Tray Tray 1 B Standard Paper Exit Tray C 1 Bin Tray 1 Product Information 26 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 29: ... D ARDF E Duplex Unit F By pass Tray Standard model Full option A Standard Paper Feed Tray Tray 1 B Standard Paper Exit Tray C 1 Bin Tray D ARDF Overview 27 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 30: ...One Tray Paper Feed Unit Option I Two Tray Paper Feed Unit Option Finisher model Basic A Standard Paper Feed Tray Tray 1 B Internal Finisher C ARDF D Duplex Unit E By pass Tray 1 Product Information 28 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 31: ...n A Standard Paper Feed Tray Tray 1 B Internal Finisher C ARDF D Side Tray E Duplex Unit F By pass Tray G One Tray Paper Feed Unit Option H Two Tray Paper Feed Unit Option Overview 29 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 32: ...ment units cyan magenta yellow 4 Development Clutch K This controls the drive power to the development unit K 5 ITB Unit Drum K Development K Motor This controls the black OPC development unit for black and ITB unit 6 Paper Feed Motor This controls the paper feed mechanisms tray 1 7 Vertical Transport Motor 1 Product Information 30 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 33: ...n rollers 9 Duplex By pass Motor This controls the duplex entrance relay exit by pass and separation rollers 10 Fusing Paper Exit Motor This controls the fusing unit and paper exit rollers 11 Inverter Motor This controls the inverter roller Overview 31 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 34: ...1 Product Information 32 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 35: ...et the machine get exposed to the following 1 Cool air from an air conditioner 2 Heat from a heater 6 Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas 7 Install the machine at locations lower than 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 8 Install the machine on a strong level base Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm 9 Do not install the machine in areas that get strong ...

Page 36: ...ources can generate ozone gas High ozone density is harmful to human health Therefore the machine must be installed in a well ventilated room A Over 100 mm 3 9 B Over 100 mm 3 9 C Over 315 mm 12 4 D Over 400 mm 15 7 Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above 2 Installation 34 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 37: ... 315 mm D 120 mm E 270 mm Power Requirements Insert the plug firmly in the outlet Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord Ground the machine 1 Input voltage level Installation Requirements 35 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 38: ...V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz More than 8 A 2 Permissible voltage fluctuation NA 108 V 120 V 10 138 V 127 V 8 66 EU AA 198 V 220 V 10 264 V 240 V 10 3 Do not put things on the power cord 2 Installation 36 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 39: ...ay Side Tray 3 One tray paper feed unit One tray paper feed unit 4 Two tray paper feed unit Two tray paper feed unit 5 Fax unit Fax unit Controller Options No Options Remarks M022 M026 M024 M028 1 IEEE 802 11a g IEEE 802 11a g I F slot A Optional Unit Combinations 37 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 40: ...ax Options No Options Remarks M022 M026 M024 M028 1 Fax Option Type C400 Fax Option Type C400 2 Memory Unit Type B 32MB Memory Unit Type B 32MB Other Options No Options Remarks M022 M026 M024 M028 1 Copy Data Security Unit Copy Data Security Unit 2 Optional Counter Interface Unit Optional Counter Interface Unit 2 Installation 38 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 41: ...lation Flow Chart Basic model This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation Finisher model This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation Copier Installation 39 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 42: ...Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of these accessories 2 Installation 40 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 43: ...card VM App 2 Me 1 Installation Procedure Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper feed unit at the same time Then install the machine and other options Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location Copier Installation 41 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 44: ... Bottles 1 Remove the tapes and the retainers on the machine 2 Push the retainer A down and then pull it to the left 3 Remove all the tapes and retainers in the tray 2 Installation 42 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 45: ...4 Open the ADF and then remove all the retainers 5 Open the front door A Copier Installation 43 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 46: ...6 Remove the waste toner bottle A 7 Remove the long screw 8 Turn the lock lever A counterclockwise and then open the drum securing plate B 2 Installation 44 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 47: ...9 Pull out the securing pin A 10 Turn the ITB lock lever A counterclockwise Copier Installation 45 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 48: ...1 Pull out the sheet of paper A 12 Turn the ITB lock lever A clockwise 13 Close the drum securing plate x 1 14 Attach the waste toner bottle 2 Installation 46 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 49: ... Close the handles A 16 Shake each toner bottle A five or six times 17 Install each toner bottle A in the machine 18 Close the front door Copier Installation 47 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 50: ...de to match the paper size To move the side guides first pull out the tray fully Then push down the green lock at the rear inside the tray Decals 1 Attach the decals A to the front door and the scanner front cover of the machine if the decals are not attached 2 Installation 48 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 51: ...urns blue when this procedure has finished 4 Make copies of image samples text photo and text photo modes 5 Do the Automatic Color Calibration process ACC for each mode Copy mode Printer 600 x 600 dpi Printer 900 x 600 dpi Printer 1800 x 600 dpi and Printer 1200 x 1200 dpi as follows 1 Print the ACC test pattern User tools Maintenance Printer Function Execute Print 2 Put the printout on the exposu...

Page 52: ...er list when the meter charge mode is selected This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station Settings for Remote Service Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site For details ask the Remote key person Check points before making Remote settings 1 The setting of SP5816 201 in the mainframe must be 0 2 Print the SMC with SP5990 002 and then check...

Page 53: ...ondition 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password Check Proxy user name and password 6 Communication error Check the network condition 8 Other error See SP5816 208 Error Codes below this 9 Request number confirmation executing Processing Please wait 5 Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816 205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI 6 Click EXECUTE to exec...

Page 54: ...tion of a confirmation and no previous registration Perform Confirmation before attempting the Registration 12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2 Check ID2 of the mainframe 12005 Remote communication is prohibited The device has an Embedded RC gate related problem Make sure that Remote Service in User Tools is set to Do not prohibit 12006 A confirmation request was...

Page 55: ...394 Mainframe not managed 2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal 2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe 2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No VM Card Installation The App2Me application must be enabled before it can be used The VM SD card including App2Me is provided with the main machine Do the following procedur...

Page 56: ...key on the operation panel 2 Touch the Extended Feature Settings button twice 3 Touch the App2Me line under the Startup Setting tab 4 Touch the Extended Feature Info tab on the LCD 5 Touch the App2Me line 6 Set Auto Start to On 7 Touch the Exit button 8 Exit the User Tools settings Do not remove the VM card from Slot 2 lower slot The VM card must remain in the machine 2 Installation 54 2 CÓPIA NÃO...

Page 57: ...enabled after data has been stored on the disk or if the encryption key is changed this process can take up to three and a half hours or more Keep the Encryption Key in a safe place If the machine loses the Encryption Key due to damaged components the controller board hard disk NVRAM and this SD Card must all be replaced at the same time Encryption key sample When the user enables encryption with ...

Page 58: ...hine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted Once the encryption process begins it cannot be stopped Make sure that the machine s main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in progress If the machine s main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress the hard disk will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable The hard disk must be replaced see c...

Page 59: ...ncryption OFF CTL HDD NVRAM SD Card Action No X X X X Replace CTL HDD SDCARD NVRAM 1 X X X X Replace CTL HDD SDCARD NVRAM 2 X X X X Replace CTL HDD SDCARD NVRAM 3 X X O O Replace CTL HDD 4 X O X X Replace CTL SDCARD NVRAM 5 X O X X Replace CTL SDCARD NVRAM 6 X O X X Replace CTL SDCARD NVRAM 7 Copier Installation 57 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 60: ... X X Replace CTL HDD SDCARD NVRAM 3 X O O O Replace CTL HDD 4 X O X X Replace CTL SDCARD NVRAM then the HDD is automatically formatted 5 X O X X Replace CTL SDCARD NVRAM then the HDD is automatically formatted 6 X O X X Replace CTL then restore the old encryption key then replace SDCARD NVRAM 7 X X O O Replace CTL then restore the old encryption key 8 O X X X Replace HDD SDCARD NVRAM 9 O X X X Rep...

Page 61: ...nistrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed 3 Make sure that Admin Authentication is ON System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication If this setting is OFF tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure 4 Make su...

Page 62: ...wer switch 7 Go into the SP mode and push EXECUTE with SP5 878 001 8 Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch Then turn off the main power switch 9 Turn on the machine power 10 Do SP5990 005 SP print mode Diagnostic Report 11 Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings Administrator Tools Auto Erase Memory Setting On 12 Exit the User Tools mode 2 Installation 60 2 CÓPIA NÃO CO...

Page 63: ...dministrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed 2 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication On If this setting is Off tell the customer that this setting must be On before you can do the installa...

Page 64: ...wing procedure 1 Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on 2 Disconnect the network cable if it is connected 3 Remove the SD card slot cover A 4 Turn the SD card label to face the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 5 Turn on the main power switch and then enter the SP mode 6 Select SP5878 002 and then press Execute on the LCD 7 Exit the SP m...

Page 65: ...is no paper left in the paper trays Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape 3 Do one of the following Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors Shrink wrap the machine tightly After you move the machine Make sure you do the Forced Line Position Adjustment as follows This optimizes color registration Do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode c SP2 111 3 Then do the Forced Line ...

Page 66: ...ocedure Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property dam...

Page 67: ...move the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding 3 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine 4 Remove the paper tray A of the machine Paper Feed Unit M368 65 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 68: ...crew using a securing bracket A to tighten the screw 6 Attach a securing bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 7 Reinstall the paper tray 2 Installation 66 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 69: ...power switch of the machine 12 Adjust the registration for each tray p 133 Image Adjustment For tray 2 use SP1002 003 For tray 3 use SP1002 004 13 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality For installing with the paper feed unit M367 1 Remove the strips of tape Paper Feed Unit M368 67 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 70: ...e upper front cover A with another cover B provided with the M367 x 1 3 Lift the M367 A and install it on the M368 B 4 Remove the paper tray C for M367 2 Installation 68 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 71: ... to tighten the screw 6 Attach a securing bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 7 Reinstall the paper tray 8 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit M368 69 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 72: ...e machine when you lift and move the machine 9 Remove the paper tray A of the machine 10 Attach a screw spring washer screw using a securing bracket A to tighten the screw 2 Installation 70 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 73: ...g bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 12 Reinstall the paper tray 13 Attach the stand covers A to the caster stands B Paper Feed Unit M368 71 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 74: ...n power switch of the machine 17 Adjust the registration for each tray p 133 Image Adjustment For tray 2 use SP1002 003 For tray 3 use SP1002 004 For tray 4 use SP1002 005 18 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality 2 Installation 72 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 75: ...on Procedure Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed The handle and grips may be damaged Paper Feed Unit M367 73 2 CÓPIA NÃ...

Page 76: ... Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding 3 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine 4 Remove the paper tray A of the machine 2 Installation 74 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 77: ...w using a securing bracket A to tighten the screw 6 Attach a securing bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 7 Reinstall the paper tray Paper Feed Unit M367 75 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 78: ...2 003 11 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality For installing with the paper feed unit M368 1 Remove the strips of tape 2 Replace the upper front cover A with another cover B provided with the M368 x 1 3 Lift the M367 A and install it on the M368 B 4 Remove the paper tray C for M367 2 Installation 76 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 79: ... to tighten the screw 6 Attach a securing bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 7 Reinstall the paper tray 8 Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit M367 77 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 80: ...e machine when you lift and move the machine 9 Remove the paper tray A of the machine 10 Attach a screw spring washer screw using a securing bracket A to tighten the screw 2 Installation 78 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 81: ...g bracket A to each side of the paper tray unit as shown x 1 M4 x 10 each 12 Reinstall the paper tray 13 Attach the stand covers A to the caster stands B Paper Feed Unit M367 79 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 82: ...n power switch of the machine 17 Adjust the registration for each tray p 133 Image Adjustment For tray 2 use SP1002 003 For tray 3 use SP1002 004 For tray 4 use SP1002 005 18 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality 2 Installation 80 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 83: ...against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Side Tray Paper Exit Unit 1 2 Side Tray 1 3 Inner Cover 1 4 Screw M4x8 2 5 Cap 2 Installation Procedure Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure Side Tray M369 81 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 84: ...1 Remove the tape A on the side tray 2 Open the duplex unit A 3 Remove the right upper cover A x 2 2 Installation 82 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 85: ... inner cover A x 1 5 Attach the right upper inner cover B provided with M369 x 1 removed in step 4 6 Set the two hooks A into the holes B in the machine Side Tray M369 83 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 86: ...7 Install the side tray paper exit unit A x 2 8 Attach the two caps B 9 Set the two tabs of the side tray A into the holes B in the machine 2 Installation 84 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 87: ...10 Close the duplex unit A 11 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 12 Check the side tray operation Side Tray M369 85 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 88: ... quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Tray 1 2 1 Bin Tray Unit 1 3 Bracket 1 4 Bind Screw M3 x 6 1 5 Screw M3 x 8 2 6 Harness clamp 3 2 Installation 86 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 89: ...Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove all tapes 2 Left rear cover A x 2 3 Left cover A p 146 4 Left upper cover A x 1 1 Bin Tray Unit M370 87 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 90: ...ree harness clamps 6 Inner rear left cover A x 1 7 Operation panel arm cover A 8 Upper front cover cap A 9 Upper front cover B x 1 10 Open the duplex unit 2 Installation 88 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 91: ...11 Inner right cover cap A 12 Inner right cover A x 3 13 Paper exit cover A x 1 1 Bin Tray Unit M370 89 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 92: ...14 Inner rear right cover A x 1 15 Attach the bracket A x 1 M3x8 2 Installation 90 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 93: ... shaft of the 1 bin tray unit B into the hole in the bracket A 17 Install the 1 bin tray unit A x 2 screw B removed in step 12 screw C M3x8 x 1 1 Bin Tray Unit M370 91 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 94: ...e B in the machine 19 Install the 1 bin tray A x 1 bind screw M3x6 x 1 x 3 20 Reassemble the machine 21 Turn on the main power switch of the machine and check the 1 bin tray unit operation 2 Installation 92 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 95: ...stallation Procedure 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box cover p 342 3 Release the harness A from the clamp 4 Install the four studs A in the controller box Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 93 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 96: ...ect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board 8 Route the harness Remove the cover A and route the harness as shown above 9 Reassemble the machine Remove the optional counter interface unit when opening or removing the controller box 2 Installation 94 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 97: ... the ICIB 3 copy data security board A to CN 212 on the IPU x 2 4 Reassemble the machine User Tool Setting 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 2 Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings Administrator Tools Copy Data Security Option On 3 Exit User Tools 4 Check the operation Copy Data Security Unit B829 95 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 98: ...set to OFF When you remove this option from the machine first set the setting to OFF with the user tool before removing this board If you forget to do this Data Security for Copying feature cannot appear in the user tool setting And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on and the machine cannot be used Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connectio...

Page 99: ... 1 Remove tray 1 from the machine 2 Remove the connector cover A x 1 3 Connect the connector B of the heater to the connector of the main machine 4 Install the heater C inside the machine x 1 5 Reassemble the machine Tray Heater Mainframe 97 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 100: ...ist No Description Q ty 1 Tray heater 1 2 Harness 1 1 3 Harness 2 1 4 Screw M4 x 10 1 5 Clamp 1 3 6 Clamp 2 1 Installation Procedure Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses 2 Installation 98 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 101: ...re not damaged or pinched after installation For Installing the Tray Heater in M367 1 Pull out the tray A in the optional paper tray 2 Rear cover A x 2 Tray Heater Optional Unit 99 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 102: ...3 Left cover A x 2 4 Pass the heater harness A through the square hole B 2 Installation 100 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 103: ...ay heater A in the paper feed unit x 1 6 Paper feed motor bracket A x 3 x 1 x 2 7 Connect the relay harness harness 2 A to the heater harness B Tray Heater Optional Unit 101 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 104: ...shown above 8 Locate the relay harness harness 2 A under the inner cover B as shown above 9 Clamp the relay harness harness 2 A x 2 Make sure that the binding B is in front of the clamp C as shown above 2 Installation 102 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 105: ... B 11 If you do not install M368 fold the relay harness harness 2 A and then clamp it as shown above Go to step 12 if you install M368 below M367 If not go to step 13 Tray Heater Optional Unit 103 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 106: ...12 Clamp the relay harness harness 2 A 13 Clamp the relay harness harness 2 A 14 Remove the rear lower cover of the machine x 3 2 Installation 104 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 107: ...s cover bracket A x 1 16 Remove the connector B of the machine 17 Connect the harness A to the connector B of the machine 18 Reassemble the machine Tray Heater Optional Unit 105 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 108: ...For Installing the Tray Heater in M368 1 Pull out the trays A in the optional paper tray 2 Rear cover A x 2 2 Installation 106 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 109: ...3 Pass the heater harness A through the square hole B 4 Install the tray heater A in the paper feed unit x 1 Tray Heater Optional Unit 107 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 110: ...eater harness B 6 Clamp the relay harness harness 1 A x 3 7 Remove the rear lower cover of the machine x 3 8 Attach the two clamps clamp 1 and then clamp the relay harness harness 1 A x 2 2 Installation 108 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 111: ...e 10 Remove the connector B of the machine 11 Connect the harness A to the connector B of the machine 12 Make sure that the harness harness 1 A is placed securely as shown above Tray Heater Optional Unit 109 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 112: ...13 Reassemble the machine 2 Installation 110 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 113: ...ck All Connections at the end of this section I F Card Slots I F slot A A is used for IEEE802 11a g Wireless LAN I F slot B B is used for File Format Converter I F slot C G is used for Gigabit Ethernet SD Card Slots Slot 1 upper C is used for application It contains the Security and Encryption Unit when shipped form the factory Controller Options 111 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 114: ...ke sure that the target SD card has enough space 1 Remove SD card VM App 2 me from SD card Slot 2 lower 2 Insert SD card in Slot 2 lower 3 Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move 4 Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 2 lower to the SD Card in Slot 1 upper Do steps 1 2 again if you want to move another application program 5 Exit the SP mode Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move ...

Page 115: ...rotect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied to this SD card 3 Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 The appli...

Page 116: ... 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Start the SP mode 6 Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec 7 Follow the messages shown on the operation panel 8 Turn the main switch off 9 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine 10 Turn the main switch on 11 Check that the application ...

Page 117: ...cedure 1 Remove the slot B cover A x 2 2 Install the file format converter A into slot B and then fasten it with screws 3 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 4 Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below Controller Options 115 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 118: ... the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section IEEE 802 11 a g Wireless LAN Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Remove the I F slot cover A from the I F slot x 2 2 Installation 116 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 119: ... can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 4 Peel off the double sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners A and then attach them at the front left of the machine 5 Attach ANT1 having a black ferrite core B 6 Attach ANT2 having a white ferrite core C Controller Options 117 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 120: ...r any type of equipment that generates strong magnetic fields Put the machine as close as possible to the access point UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802 11 a g g These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet 1 Press the User Tool...

Page 121: ...ent countries 8 WEP Encryption Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys WEP Selects Active or Inactive Inactive is default Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters 9 Press Return to Default to ...

Page 122: ...s 11 Mbps 5 5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps default Auto 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 UP mode Name Function SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry Browser Unit Type E Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord ...

Page 123: ...Push the Login Logout key 7 Login with the administrator user name and password 8 Touch Extended Feature Settings twice on the LCD 9 Touch Install on the LCD 10 Touch SD Card 11 Touch the Browser line 12 Under Install to touch Machine HDD and touch Next 13 When you see Ready to Install check the information on the screen to confirm your previous selection 14 Touch OK You will see Installing the ex...

Page 124: ...n SD slot 2 25 Attach the slot cover A x 1 26 Keep the SD card in the place see SD Card Appli Move in section of Installation after you install the application program from the card to HDD This is because The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future Gigabit Ethernet Unplug ...

Page 125: ...cable 5 cm A from the end and install the ferrite core 5 Attach the port cap to the Gigabit Ethernet port A 6 Check the operation of Gigabit Ethernet IC Card Reader 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 Controller Options 123 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 126: ...2 Attach the IC card reader A 3 Release the hook and then put the cable outside 4 Route the cable A as shown above 2 Installation 124 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 127: ...nnections 1 Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page All installed options are shown in the System Reference column Controller Options 125 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 128: ...2 Installation 126 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 129: ...3 Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See Appendices for the following information Maintenance Tables 127 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 130: ...3902 001 Cyan 3902 002 Magenta 3902 003 Yellow 3902 004 PCU Black 3902 009 Cyan 3902 0010 Magenta 3902 011 Yellow 3902 012 Fusing unit 3902 014 Fusing roller 3902 015 Fusing belt 3902 016 Image Transfer Belt Unit 3902 013 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 3902 017 Paper Transfer Roller Unit 3902 018 Waste Toner Bottle if not full or near full 3902 020 For the following units there is a new unit de...

Page 131: ...on before operation check 1 Clean the exposure glasses for DF and book scanning 2 Enter the user tools mode 3 Do the Automatic Color Calibration ACC for the copier mode printer mode as follows Print the ACC test pattern User Tools Maintenance ACC Start Put the printout on the exposure glass Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart This ensures the precise ACC adjustment Close the ARDF or the...

Page 132: ...3 Preventive Maintenance 130 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 133: ... cord the telephone line and the network cable Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards printed circuit boards or memory boards Before you start to remove components from the machine turn off the main power switch check that the shutdown process has finished then unplug the machine After the main power switch of the machine has been...

Page 134: ...ease G 501 1 B679 5100 Plug IEEE1284 Type C 1 D015 9500 G104 Yellow Toner 1 A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool 2 pcs set 1 A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart 1 Loop back Connector Parallel item 5 requires Plug IEEE1284 Type C item 11 A PC Personal Computer is required for creating the Encryption key file to an SD card Security Encryption Unit when replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD e...

Page 135: ...adjustments Use C 4 test chart to do the following adjustments Scanner sub scan magnification A Sub scan magnification 1 Put the test chart on the exposure glass Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Adjust with SP4 008 if necessary Standard 1 0 Image Adjustment 133 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 136: ...1 ARDF ARDF side to side leading edge registration and trailing edge Use A4 LT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above 1 Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the registration Check the leading edge and side to side registration Adjust the following SP modes if necessary Standard 4 2 2 mm for the leading edge registration 2 1 mm...

Page 137: ...e feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Adjust with SP6 017 001 if necessary Standard 5 0 Reduction mode 1 0 Enlargement mode 1 0 Registration Image Area 1 Feed direction 2 Image area A C 2 0 mm B D 4 2 mm Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line sp...

Page 138: ...tration can change slightly as shown on the previous page Print some pages of the 1 dot trimming pattern for step 3 and 4 Then average the leading edge and side to side registration values and adjust each SP mode 3 Do the leading edge registration adjustment 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1 001 2 Select the adjustment conditions paper type and process line speed 3 Input...

Page 139: ...with SP2 109 003 3 Check the erase margin A and B Adjust them with SP2 103 001 to 004 if necessary Leading edge 0 0 to 9 9 mm default 4 2 mm Side to side 0 0 to 9 9 mm default 2 0 mm Trailing edge 0 0 to 9 9 mm default 4 2 mm Color Registration Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints Do the following if ...

Page 140: ...n you remove or replace the image transfer belt image transfer belt unit or laser optical housing unit Printer Gamma Correction The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output You only need the printer gamma correction to fine tune to meet user requirements Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC You can adjust the gamma da...

Page 141: ... 009 Copy Photo mode Copy Letter mode Copy Letter Single Color mode Copy Photo Single Color mode Adjustment Procedure 1 Copy the C 4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust 2 Enter the SP mode 3 Select System SP 4 Select SP4 918 009 5 Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard see the table below 1 Never change Option value default value is 0 2 Adjust the density in...

Page 142: ...at of level 3 on the C 4 chart 5 K Highlight Low ID C M and Y on the full color copy Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray no C M or Y should be visible If the black scale contains C M or Y do steps 1 to 4 again Photo Mode Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart Adjustment Standard 1 ID max K Adjust the offset val...

Page 143: ...value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 4 Highlight Low ID K C M and Y Adjusttheoffsetvaluesothatdirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Text Letter Mode Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart K Adjustment Standard 1 ID max K Adjust the offset value so that the ...

Page 144: ...des with printer SP1 102 001 1200 x 1200 photo mode 1200 x 1200 text mode 2400 x 600 photo mode 2400 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode K C M Y Highlight Shadow Middle IDmax SP1 104 1 SP1 104 2 SP1 104 3 SP1 104 4 SP1 104 21 SP1 104 22 SP1 104 23 SP1 104 24 SP1 104 41 SP1 104 42 SP1 104 43 SP1 104 44 SP1 104 61 SP1 104 62 SP1 104 63 ...

Page 145: ...ty for these settings 7 Adjust the color density with SP1 104 Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart Adjust the density in this order ID Max Shadow Middle Highlight 8 Use SP1 105 001 to keep the adjusted settings Image Adjustment 143 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 146: ...t reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 020 to 1 before you start to work on the machine 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the toner collection bottle A while holding the handles B 4 Replacement and Adjustment 144 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 147: ... Remove the toner collection bottle B 5 Put the toner collection bottle B into the supplied plastic bag to prevent toner from leaking out of the bottle and then seal the bag Front Door 1 Open the front door 2 Toner collection bottle p 144 3 Release the belt A Exterior Covers 145 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 148: ...4 Front door A x 2 pin x 2 Left Cover 1 SD card cover A x 2 2 Pull out the tray 4 Replacement and Adjustment 146 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 149: ...3 Left cover A x 2 Rear Lower Cover 1 Rear lower cover A x 3 hook x 1 Rear Cover 1 Rear lower cover p 147 Exterior Covers 147 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 150: ...2 Rear cover A x 5 hooks Dust Filter 1 Dust filter covers A 2 Dust filter B 4 Replacement and Adjustment 148 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 151: ...lter 1 Exhaust filters A Right Rear Cover 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Rear cover p 147 3 Open the duplex unit 4 Release the scanner right cover A x 1 Exterior Covers 149 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 152: ...5 Right rear cover A x 3 Operation Panel 1 Remove the two cover caps A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 150 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 153: ...2 Operation panel arm cover A x 1 3 Upper front cover B x 1 4 Disconnect the USB cable A and the harness B x 2 Exterior Covers 151 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 154: ...5 Operation panel A x 5 Key Tops 1 Operation panel p 150 2 Operation panel arm holder A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 152 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 155: ...3 Operation panel rear cover A x 7 4 Operation panel bracket A x 5 x 3 5 Release the Key main board A x 5 Exterior Covers 153 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 156: ...board When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items 2 to 9 on the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press press 1 9 9 3 key press Clear Stop key 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 1 key 4 Replacement and Adjustment 154 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 157: ... shows 5 Press OK on the screen or press when you are finished 6 Touch Exit on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu Save the calibration settings Paper Exit Tray Basic model only 1 Left cover p 146 2 Left upper cover A x 1 Exterior Covers 155 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 158: ...3 Inner rear left cover A x 1 4 Paper exit cover A x 1 5 Inner rear right cover A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 156 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 159: ...6 Paper exit tray A x 1 Inner Right Cover Basic model 1 Remove the two cover caps A Exterior Covers 157 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 160: ...Operation panel arm cover A x 1 3 Upper front cover B x 1 4 Open the duplex unit 5 Open the front door 6 Remove the cover cap A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 158 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 161: ... A x 3 Finisher model 1 Remove the two cover caps A 2 Operation panel arm cover A x 1 3 Upper front cover B x 1 4 Open the duplex unit 5 Open the front door Exterior Covers 159 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 162: ...e cover B 8 Inner right cover A x 4 Inner Right Lower Cover 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Toner collection bottle p 144 3 Front door p 145 4 Open the duplex unit 4 Replacement and Adjustment 160 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 163: ...5 Right front lower cover A x 2 6 Remove the long screw A Exterior Covers 161 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 164: ...m securing plate B Make sure that the lock lever A is at home position when reassembling 8 Inner right lower cover A x 2 Right Upper Cover 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Right upper cover A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 162 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 165: ...ass 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Rear cover p 147 3 Right upper cover p 162 4 Upper front cover p 150 Operation Panel 5 Open the ARDF 6 Scanner front cover A x 1 hooks Scanner Unit 163 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 166: ...7 Scanner right cover A x 2 8 Rear scale A 9 Exposure glass A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 164 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 167: ...ARDF Exposure Glass 1 ARDF p 302 2 Scanner rear cover A x 1 3 Exposure glass p 163 4 Scanner left cover x 2 Scanner Unit 165 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 168: ...5 ARDF exposure glass cover A x 2 6 ARDF exposure glass A with bracket x 4 4 Replacement and Adjustment 166 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 169: ...h the new LED board directly by hand Grease spots will cause poor scanning quality 1 ARDF p 302 2 Scanner rear cover p 165 ARDF Exposure Glass 3 Exposure glass p 163 4 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the right side by rotating the scanner motor B clockwise Scanner Unit 167 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 170: ...motor clockwise and then remove the screw at the front side 6 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the left side by rotating the scanner motor counterclockwise and then remove the screw at the rear side 4 Replacement and Adjustment 168 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 171: ...t scanner carriage A to the right side by rotating the scanner motor clockwise 8 LED board A x 1 Scanner Motor 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Rear cover p 147 Scanner Unit 169 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 172: ... spring B 4 Scanner motor assembly A x 2 timing belt x 1 5 Scanner motor A x 2 Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor see Image Adjustment 4 Replacement and Adjustment 170 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 173: ...Sub Scan Mag See Image Adjustment Scanning p 133 Image Adjustment SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg See Image Adjustment Scanning p 133 Image Adjustment SP4 011 Main Scan Reg See Image Adjustment Scanning p 133 Image Adjustment SP4 688 DF Density Adjustment Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different Scanner Unit 171 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONT...

Page 174: ...LED DB 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Rear cover p 147 3 Release the three clamps 4 LED DB assembly A x 2 x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 172 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 175: ...HP Sensor 1 ARDF p 302 2 Scanner rear cover p 165 ARDF Exposure Glass 3 Move the 1st scanner carriage A to the right side by rotating the scanner motor B clockwise Scanner Unit 173 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 176: ...he mylar A 5 Release the three hooks 6 Scanner HP sensor A x 1 Cover Sensor 1 ARDF p 302 2 Scanner rear cover p 165 ARDF Exposure Glass 4 Replacement and Adjustment 174 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 177: ...s Front Scanner Wire 1 ARDF p 302 2 Scanner front cover p 163 Exposure Glass 3 Scanner right cover p 163 Exposure Glass 4 Scanner left cover p 165 ARDF Exposure Glass Scanner Unit 175 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 178: ...ame A x 5 6 Front scanner wire holder A x 1 7 Front scanner wire bracket B x 1 8 Front scanner wire white clip C and scanner drive pulley D x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 176 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 179: ...e left end with the ring C through the notch 3 Wind the right end counterclockwise shown from the machine s front Wind the left end clockwise The two blue marks D come together when you have done this Stick the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation Scanner Unit 177 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 180: ...ulley to the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Insert the left end into the slit B The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley C and the rear track of the movable pulley D 4 Replacement and Adjustment 178 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 181: ...right end onto the front scanner wire bracket A The end should go via the front track of the right pulley B and the front track of the movable pulley C Scanner Unit 179 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 182: ...nsert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail 10 Install the white clip G and drive pulley to the shaft H x 1 11 Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail I 12 Screw the scanner wire holder J 13 Pull out the positioning pins Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not 4 Replac...

Page 183: ...posure Glass 3 Scanner front cover p 163 Exposure Glass 4 Scanner right cover p 163 Exposure Glass 5 Scanner left cover p 165 ARDF Exposure Glass 6 Main power switch bracket A x 2 7 Scanner rear frame A x 5 Scanner Unit 181 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 184: ...end with the ball B through the drive pulley notch Pass the right end with the ring C through the drive pulley hole 3 Wind the left end B clockwise shown from the machine s front Wind the right end C counterclockwise The two blue marks D come together when you do this Attach the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pu...

Page 185: ...as the winding on the three pulleys at the front This must show as a mirror image Example At the front of the machine the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the machine At the rear of the machine it must face the rear 6 Do steps 7 through 13 again in the Front Scanner Wire Section Scanner Unit 183 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 186: ...power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit This machine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 657 663 nm and an output of 15 mW The laser can cause serious eye injury Laser Unit Before installing a new laser unit remove the polygon motor holder bracket and the tag from the new unit 4 Replacement and ...

Page 187: ...r unit x 4 2 Sponge padding B 3 Tag C 4 Reinstall the polygon motor cover A Before removing the old laser unit Do the following settings before removing the laser unit These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors in the laser unit main scan start position and laser diode power 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine 2 Enter the SP mode 3 Execute SP2 220 001 to clear the mirr...

Page 188: ...in Before removing the old laser unit before removing the laser unit you must do the following 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier 2 Left cover p 146 3 Disconnect the harness A of the skew correction motor 4 Do steps 1 to 9 of Before removing the old laser unit 5 Connect the harness A and reassemble the machine 6 Plug in and turn on the main power switch Re...

Page 189: ...2 Ventilation fan base rear A and ventilation fan base front B x 2 x 1 each 3 Left side stay A x 2 Laser Optics 187 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 190: ... A while holding the plate B Hold the harness C of the laser unit to one side when pulling out the laser unit After installing a new laser unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit 4 Replacement and Adjustment 188 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 191: ...an image problem may occur on printouts 3 Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new laser unit SP2 101 001 Color Registration Adjustment for Black SP2 102 013 015 017 019 Magnification Adjustment Main Beam Pitch Dot for each color SP2 102 014 016 018 020 Magnification Adjustment Main Beam Pitch Subdot for each color SP2 102 001 Main Magnification for Black and Standard line speed Lase...

Page 192: ...Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 1 mm If not change the standard value for the main scan magnification adjustment 6 Select 0 with SP2 109 003 after printing the 1 dot trimming pattern 7 Do the line position adjustment First do SP2 111 003 Then do SP2 111 001 To check if SP 2 111 001 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you c...

Page 193: ... cover A x 2 4 Ventilation fan A x 2 When installing the ventilation fan Make sure that the ventilation fan is installed with its decal facing the right side Laser Optics 191 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 194: ...C1b in a Z C1a Also do not use a PCDU from a Z C1a in a Z C1b Do not touch the OPC drum Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve 1 Open the front door 2 Toner collection bottle p 144 3 Remove the long screw A 4 Turn the lock lever A counterclockwise and then open the drum securing plate B 4 Replacement and Adjustment 192 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 195: ...A counterclockwise this step is only needed if you remove the PCDU K 6 PCDU A When installing a new PCDU Remove the cover on the toner inlet and pull out the tape from the new development unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine Image Creation 193 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 196: ...012 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the PCU automatically after you turn the power on again 2 If you install a new development unit only set SP 3902 xxx to 1 Black 3902 001 Cyan 3902 002 Magenta 3902 003 Yellow 3902 004 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development unit automatically after you turn the power on again 3 Turn the machine ...

Page 197: ...5 Remove the gear A and the bearing B 6 Rear cover A x 2 7 Remove the screw at the front side Image Creation 195 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 198: ...ar A withavacuum cleaner When Reinstalling the PCDU 1 When you install a new C M or Y PCU make sure that the white switch A is at the correct position for the color On the K PCU the switch is already at the K position 4 Replacement and Adjustment 196 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 199: ...ent with SP1902 001 twice 6 Do the forced line position adjustment First do SP2 111 3 Mode c Then do SP2 111 1 Mode a To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 Toner Supply Motor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box p 343 Image Creation 197 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 200: ...x1 x1 4 Toner supply motor A x 2 If the bushing white B is removed with the toner supply motor install it in the toner hopper frame as shown below 4 Replacement and Adjustment 198 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 201: ...hopper frame B Toner Collection Motor 1 Inner right lower cover p 160 2 Sensor bracket p 220 PTR Contact Motor 3 Interlock switch bracket p 220 PTR Contact Motor 4 Motor bracket p 220 PTR Contact Motor Image Creation 199 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 202: ... the two gears B and the shaft C 6 Toner collection motor A x 2 7 Apply a small amount of Silicone Grease G501 to the gear of the motor as shown above 4 Replacement and Adjustment 200 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 203: ...Sensor 1 Left cover p 146 2 Open the drum securing plate p 192 PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 3 Inner left front cover A x 1 4 Sensor bracket A x 2 x 2 Image Creation 201 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 204: ...plate p 192 PCDU Photo Conductor and Development Unit 3 Sensor bracket p 201 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor 4 Waste toner bottle set sensor A hooks RFID CPU Board 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box p 343 3 Toner hopper unit p 226 Gear Unit 4 Replacement and Adjustment 202 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 205: ...d 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box p 343 3 RFID board A x 1 hooks Toner Supply Fan 1 Left cover p 146 2 Rear cover p 147 3 Open the controller box p 343 Controller Box Image Creation 203 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 206: ... x 1 5 Toner supply fan A x 2 x 1 When installing the toner supply fan Make sure that the toner supply fan is installed with its decal facing the right side 4 Replacement and Adjustment 204 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 207: ...2 013 to 1 before you start to work on the machine 1 Open the front door 2 Toner collection bottle p 144 3 Remove the long screw A 4 Turn the lock lever A counterclockwise and then open the drum securing plate B Make sure that the lock lever A is at home position when reassembling Image Transfer 205 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 208: ...he duplex unit A If you open the duplex unit A this automatically releases the lock B for the ITB unit 6 Unlock the ITB lock lever A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 206 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 209: ...sfer unit to prevent the drum units from being exposed to light Image Transfer Belt ITB Cleaning Unit If you replace the TB cleaning unit then you must reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 017 to 1 before you start to work on the machine Do not touch or damage the surface of the image transfer belt during servicing 1 ITB unit p 205 Image Transfer 207 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓP...

Page 210: ...2 ITB unit cover A and the handles B 8 hooks 3 Three stays A x 2 each 4 Replacement and Adjustment 208 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 211: ...4 The left stay A x 4 5 Rear holder bracket A x 2 Image Transfer 209 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 212: ...6 ITB cleaning unit A 7 Pull the tension roller A as shown above 8 Remove a screw 4 Replacement and Adjustment 210 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 213: ... A 10 Remove a screw and then turn the encoder sensor A to the left When replacing the image transfer belt work carefully to avoid damaging the encoder sensor A Image Transfer 211 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 214: ... Image Transfer Belt Reset the PM counter The image transfer belt does not have any directional characteristics When installing the image transfer belt it is not required to install the image transfer belt in a specific orientation 4 Replacement and Adjustment 212 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 215: ...from the Z C1 do not use lubricant powder developer or waste toner You can also use the provided service part D0159500 G104 Yellow Toner 2 Install the ITB cleaning unit A and then collect the yellow toner by turning the image transfer belt B ITB Contact Motor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Open the controller box Controller Box Image Transfer 213 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 216: ... ITB contact motor A x 2 5 Apply a small amount of Silicone Grease G501 to the gear of the motor as shown above ITB Contact Sensor 1 PCDU K p 192 2 Rear cover p 147 4 Replacement and Adjustment 214 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 217: ...1 x 1 5 Release the toner tube K A by pulling out its gear assembly a short distance x 1 x 1 Work carefully when releasing the toner supply tube A to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands Image Transfer 215 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 218: ...6 Sensor holder A x 1 x 1 7 ITB contact sensor A x 1 hooks ID Sensor Board 1 Fusing unit p 245 4 Replacement and Adjustment 216 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 219: ...2 Remove the two screws 3 ID sensor board bracket A x 1 4 ID sensor board cover A x 1 Image Transfer 217 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 220: ... turn on the main power switch of the machine 2 Enter the SP mode 3 Input all correction coefficients A for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor board For example input 0 99 with SP3 362 013 4 Exit the SP mode 4 Replacement and Adjustment 218 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 221: ... before you start this procedure If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Remove the PTR unit A releasing the two locks B Paper Transfer 219 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 222: ...o position Do not insert objects between the metal plate B and its black plastic base Otherwise the plate could be bent and this can cause poor image quality PTR Contact Motor 1 Inner right lower cover p 160 2 Sensor bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 220 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 223: ...3 Remove four screws 4 Interlock switch bracket A x all Paper Transfer 221 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 224: ...5 Remove three screws 6 Motor bracket A x 1 x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 222 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 225: ...A x 2 8 Apply a small amount of Silicone Grease G501 to the gear of the motor as shown above PTR Contact Sensor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Motors with bracket p 235 Paper Transfer 223 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 226: ...3 Sensor bracket A x 1 4 PTR contact sensor A x 1 hooks Temperature and Humidity Sensor 1 Inner right cover p 157 4 Replacement and Adjustment 224 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 227: ...2 Temperature and humidity sensor A x 1 x 1 Paper Transfer 225 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 228: ...lopment clutch K 5 ITB Unit Drum K Development K motor 6 Paper feed motor 7 Vertical transport motor 8 Registration motor 9 Duplex By pass motor 10 Fusing paper exit motor 11 Inverter motor Gear Unit 1 Pull out the toner bottles 2 ITB unit p 205 4 Replacement and Adjustment 226 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 229: ...r cover p 147 5 Rear cover p 147 6 Right rear cover p 149 7 Controller box p 343 8 Fusing rear fan base A x 2 x 1 9 Drive unit fan base A x 2 x 1 x 1 10 PSU box p 358 Drive Unit 227 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 230: ...11 Remove the five screws for stay A 12 Stay A x 4 x 1 13 Toner supply motor brackets A x 3 x 1 x 1 each 4 Replacement and Adjustment 228 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 231: ...14 Release the three clamps and disconnect the four connectors 15 Toner hopper unit x 7 s s 16 Remove the four clips for the toner supply tubes Drive Unit 229 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 232: ...17 Toner supply tubes A Work carefully when removing the toner supply tube A to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands 4 Replacement and Adjustment 230 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 233: ...ver p 147 2 Rear lower cover p 147 3 Right rear cover p 149 4 Controller box p 343 5 Fusing rear fan base p 226 Gear Unit 6 Drive unit fan base p 226 Gear Unit 7 PSU box p 358 8 Stay p 226 Gear Unit Drive Unit 231 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 234: ...otor CMY A x 3 x 1 Development Motor CMY 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Right rear cover p 149 3 PSU box p 358 4 Remove the bracket A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 232 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 235: ...opment motor CMY A x 3 x 1 ITB Unit Drum K Development K Motor 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Right rear cover p 149 3 PSU box p 358 4 Harness guide A x 1 Drive Unit 233 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 236: ...r cover p 149 3 PSU box p 358 4 ITB unit Drum K Development K motor p 233 5 Development clutch K cover A x 2 x 1 6 Development clutch K B Fusing Paper Exit Motor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Rear lower cover p 147 3 Right rear cover p 149 4 Replacement and Adjustment 234 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 237: ...5 Drive unit fan base p 226 Gear Unit 6 Fusing paper exit motor A x 3 x 1 Motors with Bracket 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Right rear cover p 149 3 PSU box p 358 Drive Unit 235 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 238: ...4 Harness guide white A x 1 5 Remove all the connectors and clamps 6 Harness guide black A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 236 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 239: ... lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 Motors with bracket p 235 4 Registration motor A x 2 timing belt x 1 Duplex By pass Motor 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 Motors with bracket p 235 Drive Unit 237 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 240: ... x 2 timing belt x 1 Paper Feed Motor 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 Motors with bracket p 235 4 Gear with bracket A x 1 5 Bracket A x 4 4 Replacement and Adjustment 238 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 241: ...eed motor A x 2 timing belt x 1 Vertical Transport Motor 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 Motors with bracket p 235 4 Gear with bracket A x 1 Drive Unit 239 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 242: ...5 Bracket A x 4 6 Remove the bracket A and the spring B 4 Replacement and Adjustment 240 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 243: ... cover p 147 3 Right rear cover p 149 4 Controller box p 343 5 Fusing rear fan base p 226 Gear Unit 6 Drive unit fan base p 226 Gear Unit 7 PSU box p 358 8 Stay p 226 Gear Unit 9 Push the hook and then release the sensor holder A Drive Unit 241 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 244: ... 147 3 Right rear cover p 149 4 Controller box p 343 5 Fusing rear fan base p 226 Gear Unit 6 Drive unit fan base p 226 Gear Unit 7 PSU box p 358 8 Stay p 226 Gear Unit 9 Push the hook and then release the sensor holder A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 242 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 245: ...10 Drum phase sensor K A x 1 hooks Inverter Motor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Inverter motor base A x 2 x 1 Drive Unit 243 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 246: ...ve unit fan base A x 2 x 1 x 1 3 Drive unit fan A x 1 hooks When installing the drive unit fan Make sure that the drive unit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine 4 Replacement and Adjustment 244 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 247: ...ing p 260 Fusing Belt Fusing Unit If you replace a fusing unit then you must reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 014 to 1 before you start to work on the machine Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section The fusing unit can cause serious burns 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Release the lock levers A 3 P...

Page 248: ...lling the fusing unit Make sure that the both lock levers are locked before closing the duplex unit Otherwise these lock levers can be broken Cleaning Unit 1 Fusing unit p 245 2 Fusing front cover A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 246 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 249: ...3 Cleaning unit A x 4 Oil Supply Roller 1 Cleaning unit p 246 2 Oil supply roller A Fusing 247 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 250: ... correct way around If not correct the film on the oil supply roller will come off Cleaning Roller 1 Cleaning unit p 246 2 Cleaning roller A Plain Shaft Bearing 1 Cleaning unit p 246 4 Replacement and Adjustment 248 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 251: ...2 Plain shaft bearing A Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 1 Fusing front cover p 246 2 Fusing upper cover A x 4 Fusing 249 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 252: ...cover A x 3 4 Cleaning unit p 246 5 Pressure levers A x 1 each spring x 1 each 6 Release the fusing lamp harness A at the right side x 1 x 5 4 Replacement and Adjustment 250 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 253: ... the fusing lamp harness A at the left side x 1 8 Lamp holder B x 1 9 Remove the fusing lamp holder A at the right side x 1 10 Pressure roller fusing lamp A Fusing 251 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 254: ...Pressure Roller 1 Pressure roller fusing lamp p 249 2 Right stay A x 3 3 Thermostat holder A and thermistor bracket B x 4 4 Replacement and Adjustment 252 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 255: ... bearings A and gear B 5 Pressure roller C When Reinstalling the Pressure Roller When replacing the pressure roller you have to apply lubricant to the following places Fusing 253 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 256: ...ssure roller as shown above Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 1 Fusing unit p 245 2 Fusing lower cover p 249 Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 3 Cleaning unit p 246 4 Fusing upper cover p 249 Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 4 Replacement and Adjustment 254 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 257: ...5 Release the pins A and then remove the stripper plate B Fusing 255 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 258: ...6 Release the pins A and then remove the bracket B x 4 7 Release the fusing lamp harness A at the left side x 1 x 4 4 Replacement and Adjustment 256 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 259: ...8 Left stay A x 3 9 Remove the screw 10 Release the fusing lamp harnesses A and then remove the plate B x 2 x 2 Fusing 257 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 260: ...11 Remove the fusing lamp holder A x 1 12 Release the fusing lamp harness A at the right side x 1 x 5 13 Right stay A x 3 4 Replacement and Adjustment 258 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 261: ...14 Release the fusing lamp harnesses A x 2 15 Lamp holder A x 1 16 Heating roller fusing lamp A Fusing 259 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 262: ... counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 016 to 1 before you start to work on the machine 1 Heating roller fusing lamp p 254 2 C rings and bearings A 3 Gear A at the left side C ring x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 260 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 263: ...ing belt A Fusing Heating and Tension Roller If you replace a fusing roller then you must reset the PM counter for this unit To do this set SP 3902 015 to 1 before you start to work on the machine 1 Fusing belt with rollers p 260 Fusing Belt Fusing 261 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 264: ...Fusing Roller When replacing the fusing roller you have to apply lubricant to the following places Apply Barrierta S552R 0 1g to 0 2g to the left end A and right end B of the fusing roller as shown above 4 Replacement and Adjustment 262 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 265: ...crews 4 Remove the plate A and then remove the heating roller thermostats B Do not re use a thermostat that is already opened Safety is not guaranteed if you do this Heating Roller Thermistor 1 Fusing front cover p 246 Cleaning Unit 2 Fusing upper cover p 249 Fusing 263 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 266: ... lower cover p 249 4 Release the harness A x 2 5 Heating roller thermistor A x 1 x 1 Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 Cleaning unit p 246 4 Replacement and Adjustment 264 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 267: ...2 Thermistor assembly A x 1 x 1 3 Pressure roller thermistor A x 1 x 1 Pressure Roller Thermostat 1 Fusing lower cover p 249 Fusing 265 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 268: ...2 Pressure roller thermostats A x 2 Thermopile 1 Paper exit unit p 281 2 Thermopile base A x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 266 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 269: ...3 Thermopile cover A hooks 4 Thermopile B Fusing Front Fan 1 Inner right cover p 157 2 Fusing front fan base A x 2 x 1 Fusing 267 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 270: ...sing front fan Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine Fusing Rear Fan 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Fusing rear fan base A x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 268 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 271: ...ver A hooks 4 Fusing rear cover A x 1 When installing the fusing rear fan Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine Fusing 269 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 272: ...Pull out the paper tray 2 Duplex unit p 289 3 Open the guide plate A 4 Separation roller A x 1 Paper Feed Unit 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Duplex unit p 289 4 Replacement and Adjustment 270 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 273: ...3 Guide plate A 4 Bracket A x 1 5 Release the paper feed unit A x 2 Paper Feed 271 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 274: ...6 Paper feed unit A x 1 Pick up and Paper Feed Rollers 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Roller holder A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 272 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 275: ...3 Pick up roller A 4 Paper feed roller B Registration Sensor 1 Duplex unit p 289 2 Registration roller guide A x 2 Paper Feed 273 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 276: ...3 Bracket A x 2 4 Registration sensor A x 1 hooks Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper feed unit p 270 4 Replacement and Adjustment 274 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 277: ...2 Vertical transport sensor bracket A x1 x1 3 Vertical transport sensor A hooks Paper Lift Sensor 1 Paper feed unit p 270 Paper Feed 275 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 278: ...2 Paper lift sensor A x1 hooks Paper End Sensor 1 Paper feed unit p 270 2 Actuator A tab x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 276 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 279: ...3 Paper end sensor A x1 hooks Paper Feed Sensor 1 Paper feed unit p 270 2 Release the harness A x 1 Paper Feed 277 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 280: ... feed sensor bracket A x 1 4 Paper feed sensor A x1 hooks Tray Lift Motor 1 Rear cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 BCU bracket p 352 BCU 4 Replacement and Adjustment 278 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 281: ...motor A x 2 x 3 Paper Size Switch 1 Pull out the paper tray 2 Paper size switch A x 1 hooks Cleaning the Paper Dust Container 1 ITB unit p 205 2 PCDU p 192 Paper Feed 279 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 282: ...3 Peel off the tape A and clean the paper dust container B with a vacuum cleaner 4 Replacement and Adjustment 280 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 283: ...Paper Exit Paper Exit Unit Basic model 1 Fusing unit p 245 2 Left cover p 146 3 Left upper cover A x 1 4 Inner rear left cover A x 1 Paper Exit 281 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 284: ...5 Paper exit cover A x 1 6 Inner rear right cover A x 1 7 Paper exit tray A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 282 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 285: ...8 Paper exit unit holder A x 1 9 Paper exit unit A x 1 Finisher model 1 Fusing unit p 245 Paper Exit 283 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 286: ...2 Paper exit unit holder A x 1 3 Release the paper exit unit A 4 Paper exit unit A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 284 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 287: ...c model only 1 Paper exit unit p 281 2 Sensor bracket A x 1 spring x 1 3 Paper exit sensor A x 1 hooks Paper Overflow Sensor Basic model only 1 Paper exit unit p 281 Paper Exit 285 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 288: ...2 Sensor bracket A x 1 spring x 1 3 Paper overflow sensor A x 1 hooks Fusing Exit Sensor Basic model 1 Paper exit unit p 281 4 Replacement and Adjustment 286 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 289: ...2 Remove the screw for the fusing exit sensor A 3 Fusing exit sensor A x 1 Finisher model 1 Paper exit unit p 281 Paper Exit 287 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 290: ...2 Fusing exit sensor A x 1 hook x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 288 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 291: ... Unit 1 Right rear cover p 149 2 Right lower cover p 157 3 Remove the screw and disconnect the two harnesses x 2 4 Release the front and rear arms A B x 1 each Duplex Unit 289 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 292: ...5 Remove the long clip A 6 Slide the duplex unit A to the front and then remove it By pass Tray Unit 1 Duplex unit p 289 4 Replacement and Adjustment 290 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 293: ...2 Release the duplex rear cover A x 4 3 Duplex rear cover A x 2 4 Disconnect the connector A x 1 Duplex Unit 291 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 294: ...5 Remove the two clips 6 By pass tray unit A x 1 Duplex Entrance Sensor 1 Duplex unit p 289 4 Replacement and Adjustment 292 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 295: ...2 Sensor bracket A x 1 3 Duplex entrance sensor A x 1 hooks Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Fusing unit p 245 3 PTR unit p 219 Duplex Unit 293 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 296: ...4 Release the sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 5 Duplex exit sensor A x 1 hooks Inverter Sensor 1 Duplex unit p 289 4 Replacement and Adjustment 294 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 297: ...2 Guide plate A x 2 3 Bracket A x 3 4 Inverter sensor A x 1 hooks Duplex Unit 295 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 298: ... 2 Fusing unit p 245 3 PTR unit p 219 4 Sensor base A x 2 5 Sensor cover A hooks 6 Fusing entrance sensor B x 1 hooks By Pass Paper Size Sensor 1 By pass tray unit p 290 4 Replacement and Adjustment 296 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 299: ...2 By pass tray cover A hooks 3 By pass paper size sensor A x 1 When reinstalling the by pass paper size sensor Duplex Unit 297 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 300: ...r switch 5 Check this switch operation with SP5803 017 By Pass Size Detection SW Input Check Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Paper Size Display A4 SEF 00001101 B6 SEF 00001011 B5 SEF 00001001 A6 SEF 00000011 A5 SEF 00001011 Smaller A6 SEF 00001110 By pass Paper End Sensor 1 By pass tray unit p 290 2 By pass paper end sensor A x 1 hooks By pass Pick up Roller 1 Open the by pass tray 4 Replace...

Page 301: ...2 By pass pick up roller A hook x 1 By pass Feed and Separation Rollers 1 By pass tray unit p 290 2 By pass pick up roller A hook x 1 Duplex Unit 299 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 302: ... x 1 HVPS D Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before removing the HVPS D 1 Open the duplex unit 2 Fusing unit p 245 3 Paper transfer roller unit p 219 4 HVPS D cover A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 300 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 303: ...5 HVPS D A x 3 x 1 Duplex Unit 301 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 304: ...ear lower cover p 147 2 Rear cover p 147 3 Controller box cover p 342 4 Remove the bracket A x 2 5 Disconnect the ARDF cable A x 2 x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 302 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 305: ...6 Remove the left hinge A x 1 7 Open the ARDF A and then remove it When installing the Platen Sheet ARDF 303 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 306: ...ap on the upper side and on the left side ARDF Rear Cover 1 Open the ARDF left cover A 2 ARDF rear cover B x 1 ARDF Front Cover and Original Tray 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 2 ARDF front cover A x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 304 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 307: ... Remove the snap ring A 4 Remove the original tray A and release the rear shaft B Original Feed Unit 1 Open the ARDF left cover p 304 ARDF Rear Cover ARDF 305 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 308: ...2 Original feed unit A Pick Up Roller 1 Original feed unit p 305 2 Slide the shaft A hook x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 306 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 309: ...3 Pick up roller A Feed Roller 1 Original feed unit p 305 2 Remove the clip A 3 Slide the shaft A and then remove the pin B ARDF 307 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 310: ...t A and then remove the feed roller B Friction Pad 1 Original feed unit p 305 2 Friction pad A hooks ARDF Drive Board 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 4 Replacement and Adjustment 308 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 311: ... drive board A x 2 all s Original Set Sensor and ARDF Top Cover Sensor 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 2 Release the six clamps and disconnect the four connectors ARDF 309 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 312: ...3 Remove the screw 4 Remove the harness guide A and release the hooks B C 4 Replacement and Adjustment 310 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 313: ...5 ARDF top cover sensor A hooks 6 Original set sensor B hooks Feed Motor 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 ARDF 311 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 314: ...2 Remove the spring A 3 Feed motor with bracket A x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 312 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 315: ...F rear cover p 304 2 Harness guide p 309 Original Set Sensor and ARDF Top Cover Sensor 3 Slide the shaft A and then feed clutch B x 2 bushing x 1 Transport Motor 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 ARDF 313 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 316: ...2 Remove the spring A 3 Disconnect the harness of the transport motor A 4 Release the hook B of the harness guide 4 Replacement and Adjustment 314 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 317: ...5 Transport motor with bracket A x 2 6 Transport motor A x 2 Registration Sensor 1 Open the ARDF 2 Bracket A hook x 2 ARDF 315 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 318: ...3 Registration sensor holder A hook x 1 4 Registration sensor x 1 hooks Inverter Sensor 1 Open the ARDF 4 Replacement and Adjustment 316 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 319: ...2 Bracket A hook x 2 3 Inverter sensor holder A hook x 2 4 Inverter sensor x 1 hooks ARDF 317 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 320: ...Cooling Fan 1 ARDF rear cover p 304 2 Disconnect the four connectors 3 Fan cover A hook x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 318 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 321: ...4 Cooling fan A hook x 2 When installing the cooling fan Make sure that the cooling fan is installed with its decal facing the left of the machine ARDF 319 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 322: ...isher models M024 and M028 Internal Finisher 1 Inner right cover p 157 2 Remove the knob A and then remove the bracket B x 1 3 Remove the cap A and then remove the screw 4 Replacement and Adjustment 320 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 323: ...4 Left upper cover A x 1 5 Inner rear left cover A x 1 6 Disconnect the harness A and remove the screw Internal Finisher 321 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 324: ...7 Internal finisher A Output Tray Unit 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Remove the cap A 3 Output tray unit B x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 322 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 325: ...Stapler Unit 1 Stapler unit with bracket A x 2 x 2 2 Stapler unit A x 2 Gathering Roller Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 Internal Finisher 323 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 326: ...2 Gathering roller motor A x 2 x 1 Paper Exit Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Paper exit motor bracket A x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 324 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 327: ...3 Paper exit motor A x 2 Shift Roller Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Paper exit motor p 324 3 Shift roller motor bracket A x 2 Internal Finisher 325 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 328: ... x 2 x 1 x 1 Transport Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Transport motor x 2 x 1 Tray Lift Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Output tray unit p 322 4 Replacement and Adjustment 326 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 329: ...3 Release the tray lift motor bracket A x 2 x 1 x 4 4 Remove the gear A and bushing B x 1 5 Remove the gear A and shaft B x 1 Internal Finisher 327 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 330: ...6 Gear A x 1 7 Tray lift motor A x 2 Jogger Motor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Output tray unit p 322 3 Transport motor p 326 4 Replacement and Adjustment 328 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 331: ...4 Remove the cover A x 1 5 Guide plate A x 1 6 Jogger fence HP sensor bracket A x 1 Internal Finisher 329 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 332: ...7 Remove the two screws 8 Jogger motor bracket A x 1 x 2 9 Jogger motor A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 330 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 333: ...or 1 Inner right cover p 157 2 Exit guide plate motor bracket A x 2 x 1 x 1 3 Exit guide plate motor A x 2 Shift Roller HP Sensor 1 Internal finisher p 320 Internal Finisher 331 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 334: ...t roller HP sensor A x 1 hooks Gathering Roller HP Sensor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Gathering roller motor bracket A x 2 x 2 x 1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 332 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 335: ...Gathering roller HP sensor A x 1 hooks Jogger Fence HP Sensor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Output tray unit p 322 3 Remove the cover A x 1 Internal Finisher 333 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 336: ...4 Guide plate A x 1 5 Jogger fence HP sensor bracket A x 1 6 Jogger fence HP sensor A x 1 x 1 hooks 4 Replacement and Adjustment 334 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 337: ...nisher p 320 2 Entrance sensor bracket A x 1 3 Entrance sensor A x 1 x 1 Paper Exit Sensor 1 Internal finisher Internal finisher 2 Output tray unit Output tray unit Internal Finisher 335 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 338: ...3 Remove the cover A x 1 4 Guide plate A x 1 5 Paper exit sensor A x1 4 Replacement and Adjustment 336 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 339: ...r 1 Internal finisher Internal finisher 2 Paper sensor bracket A x 1 3 Paper sensor A x 1 hooks Staple Tray Paper Sensor 1 Internal finisher p 320 Internal Finisher 337 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 340: ...aper sensor bracket A x 1 3 Staple tray paper sensor A x 1 hooks Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Output tray unit p 322 4 Replacement and Adjustment 338 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 341: ...3 Tray lower limit sensor A x 1 hooks Main Board 1 Internal finisher p 320 2 Output tray unit p 322 3 Main board A x 2 x all Internal Finisher 339 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 342: ...n the old main board If the settings on the new main board are different from the old main board change the settings on the new board they must be the same as the settings on the old board 4 Replacement and Adjustment 340 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 343: ...Electrical Components Boards Rear Cover and Controller Cover Removal A IPU B Controller Board C PSU Electrical Components 341 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 344: ...Left Cover Removal D HVPS CB Board E HVPS T1T2 Board PSU Box Open F BCU Controller Box Cover 1 Rear cover p 147 4 Replacement and Adjustment 342 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 345: ...Loosen seven screws and remove one screw 5 Slide up the controller box cover A and then remove it Controller Box Remove the optional counter interface unit when opening or removing the controller box Opening the controller box 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Rear lower cover p 147 Electrical Components 343 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 346: ...3 Fan cover A x 2 4 Controller box cover p 342 5 Release the ground cable and the bracket A x 2 4 Replacement and Adjustment 344 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 347: ...6 SD card cover A x 1 7 Disconnect all the harnesses x All 8 Remove eight screws Electrical Components 345 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 348: ...controller box A Removing the controller box 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Rear lower cover p 147 3 Fan cover A x 2 4 Controller box cover p 342 4 Replacement and Adjustment 346 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 349: ...5 Release the ground cable and the bracket A x 2 6 Disconnect all the harnesses x All 7 Remove eight screws 8 Bracket A x 1 Electrical Components 347 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 350: ...ard 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box cover p 342 3 Fan cover p 343 Controller Box 4 HDD assembly p 349 HDD 5 Controller box bracket A x 5 6 Controller board A x 6 4 Replacement and Adjustment 348 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 351: ...Reassemble the machine 4 Turn on the main power of the machine Make sure you print out the SMC reports SP Mode Data and Logging Data before you replace the NVRAM Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board HDD 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Fan cover p 343 Controller Box Electr...

Page 352: ...3 Controller box cover p 342 4 HDD assembly A x 4 x 2 5 HDD A x 4 6 Disconnect the HDD harnesses A 4 Replacement and Adjustment 350 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 353: ... Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced Address book The address book and document server documents if needed must be input again If you previously backed up the address book to an SD card with S...

Page 354: ... x 2 x 1 When installing the controller fan Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side BCU 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 4 Replacement and Adjustment 352 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 355: ...g B to the downward side When installing the new BCU 1 Remove the EEPROM from the old BCU 2 Install the EEPROM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU 3 Reassemble the machine 4 Turn on the main power of the machine 5 SC995 01 occurs 6 Enter the serial number with SP5811 004 7 Turn the main power of the machine off and on Electrical Components 353 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 356: ...EPROM away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage EEPROM data Removing the BCU with bracket 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 PSU box p 358 3 Release the six clamps and disconnect all the harnesses 4 Replacement and Adjustment 354 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 357: ...4 BCU with bracket A x 4 Electrical Components 355 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 358: ...if possible 6 Turn off the main switch Then unplug the power cord 7 Replace the EEPROM on the BCU and reassemble the machine 8 Plug in the power cord Then turn the main switch on 9 SC195 occurs 10 Copy the data from the SD card to the EEPROM SP5 825 001 if you have successfully copied them to the SD card 11 Turn the main switch off Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2 12 Turn the main switc...

Page 359: ...Then unplug the power cord 4 Install a New NVRAM on the controller Then reassemble the machine 5 Turn the main switch on 6 SC995 02 occurs 7 Turn the machine off and on 8 Do the process control self check 9 Do ACC for the copier application program 10 Do ACC for the printer application program IPU 1 Rear cover p 147 2 Controller box cover p 342 3 IPU A x 6 x 3 x all Electrical Components 357 4 CÓP...

Page 360: ...e PSU box 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Connector bracket A x 2 3 Open the PSU box A x 5 x All x All Removing the PSU box 1 Rear lower cover p 147 4 Replacement and Adjustment 358 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 361: ...Bracket A x 1 3 PSU box A x 5 x All x All PSU 1 Rear lower cover p 147 2 Connector bracket p 358 3 Disconnect all the harnesses x All Electrical Components 359 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 362: ...4 SDB holder A x 2 5 PSU board A x 10 x all HVPS T1T2 Board 1 Left cover p 146 4 Replacement and Adjustment 360 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 363: ...d A x 6 x 6 x 2 HVPS CB Board 1 Left cover p 146 2 Toner collection bottle p 144 3 Remove the connector cover A and then disconnect the connector B Electrical Components 361 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 364: ...4 Board bracket A x 3 x 5 x 2 5 HVPS CB board A x 6 All s SDB 1 Rear lower cover p 147 4 Replacement and Adjustment 362 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 365: ...2 SDB A x 4 x 2 Electrical Components 363 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 366: ...4 Replacement and Adjustment 364 4 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 367: ...for use by service representatives only If this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason data might be deleted or settings might be changed In such case product quality cannot be guaranteed any more Entering SP Mode For details ask your supervisor Exiting SP Mode Press Exit on the LCD twice to return to the copy window Types of SP Modes System SP SP modes related to...

Page 368: ...s to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation 6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes 7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group 8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display page 9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line line by line 10 Press to move the highlight on the...

Page 369: ... in the copy window to return to the SP mode display 7 Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished Exiting Service Mode Press the Exit key on the touch panel Service Mode Lock Unlock At locations where the machine contains sensitive data the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off This function makes sure that...

Page 370: ...91 105 g m2 24 28lb Thick Paper 1 106 169 g m2 28 5 44 9lb Thick Paper 2 170 220 g m2 45 58lb Thick Paper 3 221 256 g m2 59lb 68lb Thick Paper 4 257 300 g m2 68 4 79 8lb Paper Type N Normal paper MTH Middle thick paper TH Thick paper Paper Feed Station P Paper tray B By pass table Color Mode Color K Black in B W mode Y M or C Yellow Magenta or Cyan in Full Color mode YMC Only for Yellow Magenta an...

Page 371: ... NVRAM and EEPROM If you do a RAM clear this SP mode will be reset to the default value ENG and CTL show which NVRAM contains the data ENG EEPROM on the BCU board CTL NVRAM on the controller board The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right hand column of the SP table in the following way Adjustable range Default setting Step Alphanumeric If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the ...

Page 372: ...step 004 Tray Thick2 ENG 9 to 9 3 7 0 1 mm step 005 Tray Thick3 ENG 9 to 9 3 5 0 1 mm step 006 Tray Plain 1200 ENG 9 to 9 0 8 0 1 mm step 007 Tray Middle Thick 1200 ENG 9 to 9 0 5 0 1 mm step 008 Tray Thick1 1200 ENG 9 to 9 0 5 0 1 mm step 009 By pass Plain ENG 9 to 9 3 9 0 1 mm step 010 By pass Middle Thick ENG 9 to 9 0 1 0 1 mm step 011 By pass Thick1 ENG 9 to 9 1 8 0 1 mm step 012 By pass Thick...

Page 373: ...or each mode and tray Increasing a value an image is moved to the rear edge of paper Decreasing a value an image is moved to the front edge of paper 001 By pass ENG 4 to 4 0 0 0 1 mm step 002 Paper Tray 1 ENG 003 Paper Tray 2 ENG 004 Paper Tray 3 ENG 005 Paper Tray 4 ENG 006 Duplex ENG 1003 Paper Buckle Paper Buckle Adjustment Tray Location Paper Type Paper Type N Normal TH Thick Adjusts the amoun...

Page 374: ...1 to 9 1 1 mm step 015 Paper Tray1 Thick1 1200 ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 016 Paper Tray2 3 4 Plain 1200 ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 017 Paper Tray2 3 4 Middle Thick 1200 ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 018 Paper Tray2 3 4 Thick1 1200 ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 019 By pass Plain 1200 ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 020 By pass Middle Thick 1200 ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 021 By pass Thick1 1200 ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 022 Dup...

Page 375: ... step 020 Control Switch Temp ENG 0 to 100 16 1 deg step 1104 Fusing Idling Before Job 001 Environment Thresh ENG 0 to 2 2 1 step 0 Low Temp 1 Low Normal 2 All Env 002 Idling Temp P Roll ENG 0 to 160 160 1 deg step Specifies the threshold temperature for the pressure roller idling before a job 003 Idling Time BW ENG Specifies the fusing idling time for each printe mode before a job 0 to 10 2 1 sec...

Page 376: ...in Thick OHP Middle Thick Special 001 Fusing Ready Temp ENG 100 to 180 160 1 deg step Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition 002 Fusing Ready Offset ENG 5 to 30 11 1 deg step 003 P Roll Ready Target Temp ENG 50 to 160 120 1 deg step 007 P Roll Ready Temp ENG 0 to 150 20 1 deg step Sets the heating roller offset temperature at the end of the heating roller This valu...

Page 377: ...0 1 deg step Specifies the pressure roller temperature in the low power mode 019 Off Mode Center ENG Specifies the heating roller temperature center or ends in the sleep mode 0 to 180 0 1 deg step 020 Off Mode Ends ENG 021 Off Mode P Roller ENG 0 to 170 0 1 deg step Specifies the pressure roller temperature in the sleep mode 030 to 239 Thetargetfusingtemperatureforeachpapertypeandmodecanbeadjusted...

Page 378: ...ex Center ENG 100 to 180 165 1 deg step 047 Thick 1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 048 Thick 1 FC Duplex Center ENG 049 Thick 1 FC Duplex Ends ENG 050 Thick 1 BW Simplex Center ENG 051 Thick 1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 052 Thick 1 BW Duplex Center ENG 053 Thick 1 BW Duplex Ends ENG 054 Thick 2 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 140 1 deg step 055 Thick 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 056 OHP FC ENG 100 to 180 160 1 deg step...

Page 379: ...P 2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 068 SP 2 FC Duplex Center ENG 069 SP 2 FC Duplex Ends ENG 070 SP 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 071 SP 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 072 SP 2 BW Duplex Center ENG 073 SP 2 BW Duplex Ends ENG 074 SP 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 200 150 1 deg step 075 SP 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 076 SP 3 FC Duplex Center ENG 077 SP 3 FC Duplex Ends ENG 078 SP 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 079 SP 3 BW Simplex Ends ...

Page 380: ... 100 to 180 140 1 deg step 088 Thick 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 089 Thick 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 160 1 deg step 090 Thick 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 091 Thick 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 092 Thick 3 BW Simplex Ends ENG 109 M Thick FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 175 1 deg step 110 M Thick FC Duplex Center ENG 111 M Thick BW Simplex Center ENG 112 M Thick BW Duplex Center ENG 113 M Thick FC Simplex ...

Page 381: ...1 deg step 129 F Plain1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 130 F Plain1 BW Simplex Center ENG 131 F Plain1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 132 F Plain2 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 130 1 deg step 133 F Plain2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 134 F Plain2 BW Simplex Center ENG 135 F Plain2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 136 F MThick FC Simplex Center ENG 137 F MThick FC Simplex Ends ENG 138 F MThick BW Simplex Center ENG 139 F MThick BW Simplex...

Page 382: ...Simplex Ends ENG 170 F SP 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 171 F SP 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 201 Plain1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 120 1 deg step 202 Thin Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 203 Thick1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 130 1 deg step 204 Thick2 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 205 Thick3 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 206 OHP Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 80 1 deg step 2...

Page 383: ...ex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 220 F Thick1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 221 F SP 1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 105 1 deg step 222 F SP 2 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 223 Plain1 Duplex Press ENG 50 to 160 90 1 deg step 224 Thick1 Duplex Press ENG 225 Thick2 Duplex Press ENG 226 SP 1 Duplex Press ENG 227 SP 2 Duplex Press ENG 228 SP 3 Duplex Press ENG 229 MThick D...

Page 384: ...eating roller has two lamps One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller 003 Pressure Roller Center 10 to 250 0 1 deg step The pressure roller has two lamps One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller 1108 Ready Temp Setting Japan use only 007 Ready Temp Time ENG 22 to 60 43 0 1 sec step 1109 Fusin...

Page 385: ...cted thevalueofthisSPisaddedtotheheating roller temperature 004 High Temp Correction ENG 0 to 15 3 1 deg step Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller When the high temperature condition specified with SP1112 002 is detected the value of this SP is subtracted from the heating roller temperature 005 Offset Temp Low ENG 0 to 15 5 0 1 deg step 006 Offset Temp High ENG 0 to 15 3 0 1...

Page 386: ...e This idling during the stand by mode prevents the roller deformation 002 Idling Time ENG 0 to 60 2 0 1 sec step Specifies the length of each idling operation during stand by mode 003 Idling Speed ENG 0 to 1 0 1 mm sec step 1116 Fusing Temp Change Paper Type MThick Middle Thick 010 Center Temp 1 ENG 10 10 0 1 deg step Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the pap...

Page 387: ...d when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper 019 Control Time 2 ENG 0 to 250 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 012 and 013 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper 022 Center Temp 1 MThick ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 023 Ends Temp 1 MThick ENG 024 ...

Page 388: ...onment 002 Humidity Thresh 1 ENG 0 to 100 65 1 Specifies the first threshold humidity for executing the curl correction 003 Humidity Thresh 2 ENG 0 to 100 80 1 Specifies the second threshold humidity for executing the curl correction 004 Pattern 1 MM H Roll ENG 30 to 0 3 1 deg 005 Pattern 1 MM P Roll ENG 0 to 60 0 1 deg 006 Pattern 1 HM H Roll ENG 30 to 0 0 1 deg 007 Pattern 1 HM P Roll ENG 0 to 6...

Page 389: ...4 size However it is not used on machines in which there are two heating lamps such as A4 MFPs which almost never change between A4 and A5 1121 Maximum Duty Switch 001 Control Method Switch ENG 0 or 1 1 1 Selects the power control method for the fusing unit 0 Fixed control 1 Power control 1159 Fusing Jam Detection 001 SC Display ENG 0 or 1 0 1 Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam three t...

Page 390: ...1 Development Fan1 ENG 0 to 600 0 1 sec step 002 Development Fan2 ENG 003 Imaging Fan Laser Unit Fan ENG 004 Fusing Exit Sensor Cooling Fan ENG 005 Fusing Exit Fan ENG 006 PSU Fan ENG 007 Paper Feed Drive Fan Toner Supply Fan ENG 008 Toner Supply Fan Drive Unit Fan ENG 009 CTL Upper Fan Fusing Cooling Fan ENG 5 System Maintenance 388 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 391: ...ntal condition is determined automatically 1 LL 2 ML 3 MM 4 MH 5 HH 003 Absolute Humidity Thresh 1 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between LL and ML DFU 0 to 100 4 3 0 01 g m3 step 004 Absolute Humidity Thresh 2 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between ML and MM DFU 0 to 100 11 3 0 01 g m3 step 005 Absolute Humidity Thresh 3 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between MM and MH DFU 0 to 100 18...

Page 392: ...012 Previous Relative Humidity Display ENG Displays the previous relative humidity 0 to 100 0 1 RH step 013 Previous Absolute Humidity Display ENG Displays the previous absolute humidity 0 to 100 0 0 01 g m3 step 2015 Charge AC Adjustment Result 001 Plain Bk ENG 0 to 9 0 1 step 002 Plain C ENG 003 Plain M ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 2101 Color Registration Correction These values are the parameters for th...

Page 393: ...deleting image data at the margins 001 Lead Edge Width ENG 0 to 9 9 4 2 0 1 mm step 002 Trailing Edge Width ENG 003 Left ENG 0 to 9 9 2 0 1 mm step 004 Right ENG 2104 Unit LD Power Adj Adjusts the LD initial power These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed 001 LD1 K ENG 60 to 140 100 0 1 step 002 LD2 K ENG 003 LD1 C ENG 004 LD2 C ENG 005 LD1 M ENG 006 LD2 M ENG 007 LD1 Y ENG 0...

Page 394: ...rayscale Vertical Margin 21 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 22 Two Beam 23 Full Dot Pattern 005 Color Selection Specifies the color for the test pattern 1 to 4 1 1 step 1 All colors 2 C 3 M 4 Y 006 Density Bk Specifies the color density for the test pattern 0 to 15 15 1 step 0 Lightest density 15 Darkest density 007 Density C 008 Density M 009 Density Y 2111 Forced Line Position Adj 001 Mode a Execute...

Page 395: ...se M ENG 003 Pulse Y ENG 2118 Skew Adjustment 001 Execute C ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117 002 Execute M ENG 003 Execute Y ENG 2119 Skew Adjustment Display Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor 001 C ENG 75 to 75 0 1 pulse step 002 M ENG 003 Y ENG 2140 ID Sensor Check Result Displays the maximum result values of the ID se...

Page 396: ...c line position adjustment and the process control 001 Average Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step 002 Average C ENG 003 Average M ENG 004 Average Y ENG 005 Average Front ENG 006 Average Center ENG 007 Average Rear ENG 2142 ID Sensor Check Result Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 5 Syst...

Page 397: ... for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step 002 Minimum C ENG 003 Minimum M ENG 004 Minimum Y ENG 005 Minimum Front ENG 006 Minimum Center ENG 007 Minimum Rear ENG 2144 ID Sensor Check Result Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the pro...

Page 398: ...2 Front ENG 006 Minimum 2 Center ENG 007 Minimum 2 Rear ENG 2150 Area Mag Correction LD Pulse Area Correction Color Area FA Adjusts the magnification for each area The main scan 297 mm is divided into 13 areas Area 1 is at the front side of the machine left side of the image and area 13 is at the rear side of the machine right side of the image Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left ...

Page 399: ... Area 0 Bk LD2 ENG 041 Area 1 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 233 1sub dot step 042 Area 2 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 193 1sub dot step 043 Area 3 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 58 1sub dot step 044 Area 4 Bk LD2 ENG 045 Area 5 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 143 1sub dot step 046 Area 6 Bk LD2 ENG 047 Area 7 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 47 1sub dot step 048 Area 8 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 23 1sub dot step 049 Area 9 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 0...

Page 400: ...Area 0 C LD2 ENG 093 Area 1 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 234 1sub dot step 094 Area 2 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 195 1sub dot step 095 Area 3 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 56 1sub dot step 096 Area 4 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 57 1sub dot step 097 Area 5 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 143 1sub dot step 098 Area 6 C LD2 ENG 099 Area 7 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 50 1sub dot step 100 Area 8 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 20 1sub dot step 101 Area 9 C LD2...

Page 401: ...4 Area 0 M LD2 ENG 145 Area 1 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 232 1sub dot step 146 Area 2 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 192 1sub dot step 147 Area 3 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 60 1sub dot step 148 Area 4 M LD2 ENG 149 Area 5 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 142 1sub dot step 150 Area 6 M LD2 ENG 151 Area 7 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 45 1sub dot step 152 Area 8 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 26 1sub dot step 153 Area 9 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 0 1sub dot...

Page 402: ... Area 12 Y LD1 ENG 196 Area 0 Y LD2 ENG 197 Area 1 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 233 1sub dot step 198 Area 2 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 194 1sub dot step 199 Area 3 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 60 1sub dot step 200 Area 4 Y LD2 ENG 201 Area 5 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 144 1sub dot step 202 Area 6 Y LD2 ENG 203 Area 7 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 46 1sub dot step 204 Area 8 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 25 1sub dot step 205 Area 9 Y LD2 ENG ...

Page 403: ... 005 Minute ENG 0 to 59 0 1 minute step 006 Temperature ENG 0 to 100 0 1 deg step 007 Execution Result ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Completed successfully 1 Failed 008 Number of Execution ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 times step 009 Number of Failure ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 times step 010 Error Result C ENG 0 to 9 0 1 step 0 Not done 1 Completed successfully 2 Cannot detect patterns 3 Fewer lines on the pattern than t...

Page 404: ...ias Image Transfer Belt B W Bias Adjustment Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Image Transfer Standard Speed ENG 0 to 80 26 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B W mode for plain paper 002 Image Transfer Middle Speed ENG 0 to 80 17 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B W mode for M Thick paper 003 Image Transfer Low Speed ENG 0 to 80 7 1 A...

Page 405: ... Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 2407 Plain1 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in full color mode Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 38 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 40 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 21 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A step...

Page 406: ...4 Paper Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 2441 Plain2 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain2 paper in full color mode Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 38 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 40 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 21 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A...

Page 407: ... paper transfer roller for thin paper in black and white mode Normal 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 23 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2457 Thin Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode Normal 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 29 1 A step 003 Pa...

Page 408: ...o 230 9 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2507 Thick 1 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 24 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Middle Spd 2nd ENG Not used 003 Paper Transfer Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low Sp...

Page 409: ...165 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer 1 Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer 2 Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer 1 Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer 2 Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2562 Thick 2 Size Correction FC Adjusts the size ...

Page 410: ...NG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer 2 Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2601 OHP Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP 001 Separation DC ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 2603 OHP Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 230 8 1 A step 2608 OHP Bias FC Ad...

Page 411: ...200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2612 OHP Size Correct FC Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 003 Paper Transfer S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer S3 ENG 100 to 99...

Page 412: ...ze Correct BW Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2648 and SP2649 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1 Side S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer 2 Side S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer 1 Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2 Side S2 ENG...

Page 413: ...r Transfer 1 Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2 Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1 Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2 Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer 1 Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 st...

Page 414: ...1 A step 2707 Middle Thick Bias FC Standard 260mm sec Low 85mm sec Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color mode 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 35 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 230 25 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 14 1 A step 2751 Special 1 Bias Adjusts t...

Page 415: ...001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 35 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 230 25 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 14 1 A step 2801 Special 2 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 2 Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Separation DC Middle Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 00...

Page 416: ...ep 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A step 2851 Special 3 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 3 Low 85 mm sec 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 004 Separation DC Low Spd 2nd ENG 2852 Special 3 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black and white mode Low 85 mm sec 003 Paper Transfer Lo...

Page 417: ...Motor Ctrl 001 Bk TransferMotorCtrl ENG DFU 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 FG Control 1 ENC Control 002 BkTransferMotorCtrl SC443 Count ENG 0 to 3 0 1 step Displays the detection times of SC443 003 BkTransferMotorCtrl 85 ENG DFU 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 FG Control 1 ENC Control Main SP Tables 2 415 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 418: ...cutes the process control that is normally done atthesametimeasMUSIC ThisSPdoestheMUSIC line position adjustment twice 005 Normal MUSIC Executes the process control that is normally done atthesametimeasMUSIC ThisSPdoestheMUSIC line position adjustment once 3012 Process Cont Check Result Process Control Self check Result Displays the result of the latest process control self check All colors are di...

Page 419: ...color 002 Execution COL 003 Execution Bk 004 Execution C 005 Execution M 006 Execution Y 3014 T Sensor Initial Set Result Developer Initialization Result Display 001 Display Latest YMCK ENG 0 to 9999 1 step 1 Success 2 to 9 Failure Displays the developer initialization result See the Error Condition Tables in the Process Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code All colors are ...

Page 420: ...upply Time Y ENG 3021 TD Sensor Initial Set Developer Initialization Setting Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization 001 Agitation Time Bk ENG 0 to 200 65 1 sec step 002 Agitation Time C ENG 003 Agitation Time M ENG 004 Agitation Time Y ENG 005 008 Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 0 or 1 0...

Page 421: ...8 Execution Flag Y ENG 3041 Process Control Type 001 Voltage Control ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED Use the fixed values for the charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2 005 and SP2 229 1 CONTROL Enables or disables the process control 002 LD Power Control ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED at the value in SP2221 xxx 1 CONTROL adjusted by process control Selects the LD p...

Page 422: ...e times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled 002 Repeat Number Initiallization ENG 0 to 9 3 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer initialization 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times ...

Page 423: ...dark 6 to 9 Disabled 005 Repeat Number Recovery ENG 0 to 9 3 1 time step Not used 006 Repeat Number Job End ENG 0 to 9 4 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when t...

Page 424: ...0 to 80 22 1 A step Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan 016 T1 Bias Y ENG 0 to 80 22 1 A step Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow 017 Developer Mixing Time ENG 0 to 255 10 1 sec step Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment 018 Consumption Pattern LD DUTY Bk ENG 0 to 15 15 1 step Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner densit...

Page 425: ...hen the detected development gamma values SP3611 004 exceed the target values SP3611 008 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 3044 Toner Supply Type Toner Supply Type Color Selects the toner supply method type 001 Bk ENG 0 to 4 4 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED with the supply rates stored with SP 3401 1 PID Vtref_Fixed 2 PID Vtref_Control 3 MBD Vtref_Fixed 4 MBD Vtref_Control 002 C ENG 00...

Page 426: ...Shift Y ENG 0 to 5 0 45 0 01 V step 005 Low Speed Shift Bk ENG 0 to 5 0 84 0 01 V step 006 Low Speed Shift C ENG 0 to 5 0 87 0 01 V step 007 Low Speed Shift M ENG 008 Low Speed Shift Y ENG 0 to 5 0 84 0 01 V step 009 Mid TC Shift Bk ENG 0 5 to 0 5 0 0 01 V step 010 Mid TC Shift C ENG 011 Mid TC Shift M ENG 012 Mid TC Shift Y ENG 013 Low TC Shift Bk ENG 014 Low TC Shift C ENG 015 Low TC Shift M ENG...

Page 427: ... Current Bk ENG 2 45 to 5 3 5 0 01 V step 010 182 Current C ENG 011 182 Current M ENG 012 182 Current Y ENG 013 182 Initial Bk ENG 014 182 Initial C ENG 015 182 Initial M ENG 016 182 Initial Y ENG 3222 Vtcnt Display Set Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 002 Current C ENG 003 Current M ENG 004 Current Y ENG Main SP Tables 3 425 5 CÓ...

Page 428: ... step 002 Consumption C ENG 003 Consumption M ENG 004 Consumption Y ENG 005 Consumption Bk ENG 006 Consumption C ENG 007 Consumption M ENG 008 Consumption Y ENG 009 012 Threshold for development gamma rank 009 P Rank 1 Threshold ENG 0 to 2 0 5 0 01 step 010 P Rank 2 Threshold ENG 0 to 2 0 25 0 01 step 011 P Rank 3 Threshold ENG 2 to 0 0 25 0 01 step 012 P Rank 4 Threshold ENG 2 to 0 0 5 0 01 step ...

Page 429: ...harge bias referring to the development bias at process control 0 to 255 158 1 V step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 0 001 x SP3 241 001 to 004 these values 006 Offset C ENG 007 Offset M ENG 008 Offset Y ENG 3242 LD Power Setting Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control 001 Standard Speed Coefficient Bk ENG 1000 to 1000 152 1 step 002 Standard Speed Coefficien...

Page 430: ...Low Speed Offset Bk ENG 1000 to 1000 16 1 step 022 Low Speed Offset C ENG 023 Low Speed Offset M ENG 024 Low Speed Offset Y ENG 3251 Coverage These 001 to 016 are coefficients for SP3 222 009 to 012 001 Latest Pixcel Bk ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color 0 to 9999 0 1 cm2 step 002 Latest Pixcel C ENG 003 Latest Pixcel M ENG 004 Latest Pixcel Y ENG 005 008 Displays the average coverage...

Page 431: ... pages does not reach the number specified with SP3 251 019 013 Average L Bk ENG 0 to 100 5 0 01 step 014 Average L C ENG 015 Average L M ENG 016 Average L Y ENG 017 019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3 251 005 to 016 017 Total Page Setting S ENG 1 to 100 50 1 sheet step 018 Total Page Setting M ENG 1 to 500 10 1 sheet step 019 Total Page Setting L ENG 1 to 999 50 1 sheet step 020 022 Adjusts the thr...

Page 432: ...p 002 Voffset reg C ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 003 Voffset reg M ENG 004 Voffset reg Y ENG 005 007 Displays the ID sensor diffusion offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 005 Voffset dif C ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 006 Voffset dif M ENG 007 Voffset dif Y ENG 008 010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 008 Voffset TM Front ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 009 Voffset TM Center ENG 010 ...

Page 433: ...s the result of the Vsg adjustment The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor sensor for Front sensor for Bk sensor for Cyan sensor for Center sensor for Magenta sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear 001 Latest ENG 111 to 9999 9999 1 step 9 Unexpected error 3 Offset voltage error 2 Vsg adjustment value error 1 O K 002 Latest 1 ENG 003 Latest 2 ENG 004 Latest 3 ENG 005 Latest 4 ENG 006 La...

Page 434: ...100 1 step 002 Latest C ENG 003 Latest M ENG 004 Latest Y ENG 3421 Toner Supply Range 001 Upper Limit Bk ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing 0 to 100 100 1 step 002 Upper Limit C ENG 003 Upper Limit M ENG 004 Upper Limit Y ENG 005 Minimum Supply Time Bk ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time 0 to 1000 200 1 msec step 006 Minimum Supply Time C ENG 007 Minimum Supply Time M ENG 008 ...

Page 435: ...c step 002 Motor Break Time ENG 0 to 10000 200 1 msec step 3501 Process Control Target M A Adjusts the target M A of the full coverage in single color printer mode 001 Maximum M A Bk ENG 0 to 1 0 482 0 001 mg cm2 step 002 Maximum M A C ENG 0 to 1 0 5 0 001 mg cm2 step 003 Maximum M A M ENG 004 Maximum M A Y ENG 3510 Image Quality Adj Counter Display Displays the total page counter for each adjustm...

Page 436: ...cess Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 004 Interrupt Process Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step 005 Initial Potential Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 250 1 page step 006 Initial Potential Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 100 1 page step 007 Vsg Adj Counter ENG 0 to 2000 0 1 page step 008 Charge AC Control Counter ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 019 Envir Correction ON OFF ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Not Cor...

Page 437: ...hetimingforexecutionofprocesscontrolandlinepositionadjustmentduringprinting 001 During Job ENG 0 to 100 10 1 page step 002 During Stand by ENG 0 to 100 10 1 minute step 3513 PCU Motor Stop Time Bk Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped These are used for process control execution timing 001 Year ENG 0 to 99 0 1 step 002 Month ENG 1 to 12 1 1 step 003 Day ENG 1 to 31 1 1 step 004 Hour E...

Page 438: ...eaning blade in the transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged If the temperature is above this value toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over 001 Execution Temp Thresh ENG 0 to 50 0 1 deg step 3519 Toner End Prohibition Setting Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end 001 Process Control ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Permit ...

Page 439: ...by is executed 001 Non use Time Setting ENG 0 to 1440 360 1 minute step 002 Temp Range ENG 0 to 99 10 1 deg step 003 Relative Humidity Change ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 004 Absolute Humidity Change ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m3 step 005 Maximum Execution Number ENG Adjusts the maximum execution time for the process control at stand by 0 to 99 10 1 time step 3611 Development Gamma Display Set 001 Bk Current E...

Page 440: ... 1 32 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 011 M Standard Target Set ENG 012 Y Standard Target Set ENG 013 Environmental Correction ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development gamma 0 or 1 1 0 Not Correct 1 Correct 014 K Max Correction ENG 0 to 5 0 23 0 01 mg cm2 kv step 015 C Max Correction ENG 016 M Max Correction ENG 017 Y Max Correction ENG 018 K Max Abs Hum ENG 1 to 99 10 1 g m3 st...

Page 441: ...ep 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 005 Middle Speed Bk ENG 006 Middle Speed C ENG 007 Middle Speed M ENG 008 Middle Speed Y ENG 009 Low Speed Bk ENG 010 Low Speed C ENG 011 Low Speed M ENG 012 Low Speed Y ENG 3631 Charge DC Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control ...

Page 442: ...012 Low Speed Y ENG 3641 Charge AC Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color 001 Standard Speed Bk ENG 0 to 3 1 75 0 01 kV step 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 3651 LD Power Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Displays the LD power adjusted for each e...

Page 443: ...ntrol Setting Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory which is in the TD sensor 001 Control Selection ENG 0 or 1 1 0 Not Use 1 Use 3711 HST Concentration Control Bk Displays the factory settings of the black PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 1 22 to 3 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V step ...

Page 444: ...trol C Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 1 22 to 3 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 2 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 ...

Page 445: ...n ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 ENG 0 to 255 1 V step 010 Serial Number 2 ENG 011 Adjustment Vt ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 012 Adjustment Vtref ENG 013 260 Adjustment Vtcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 014 Adjustment Gamma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 015 Adjustment Vcnt Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1...

Page 446: ...amma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 015 Adjustment Vcnt Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step 016 182 Adjustment Vtcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 3800 Toner Collection Bttl Full Displays adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings 001 Condition ENG 0 to 4 0 1 step Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle 0 Factory default 1 Before near full 2 Near full 3 Full 4 Re...

Page 447: ...step 011 Pixel Count Threshold 2 ENG 0 to 1000000 120000 1 step 014 Mechanism Full Detection Date ENG Displays the date of the near full detection for the PCDU toner collection bottle 3901 New Unit Detection Turns new PCU detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON 3902 Manual New Unit Set Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off 001 Development Unit Bk ENG 0...

Page 448: ... is for the image transfer belt cleaning unit 014 Fusing Unit ENG 015 Fusing Roller ENG 016 Fusing Belt ENG 017 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit ENG 018 Paper Transfer Unit ENG 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 020 Image Transfer Toner Collection Bottle ENG 5 System Maintenance 446 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 449: ... free fun with each mode 001 HP Detection Enable Scanner free run with HP sensor check 002 HP Detection Disable Scanner free run without HP sensor check 4020 DF Dust Check 001 Dust Detection ON OFF ENG Turns the ARDF scan glass dust check on off 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Dust Detect Level ENG Selects the detect level 0 to 8 4 1 step 0 lowest detection level 8 highest detection level Main SP T...

Page 450: ...Original These SPs set the area to be masked during platen book mode scanning 001 Book Sub LEdge 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step 002 Book Sub TEdge 003 Book Main LEdge 004 Book Main TEdge 005 ADF Sub LEdge 007 ADF Main LEdge 008 ADF Main TEdge 4417 IPU Test Pattern Selects the IPU test pattern 001 Test Pattern Selection 0 to 24 0 1 step 5 System Maintenance 448 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 451: ...rid pattern 21 Scanned Gray scale 22 Scanned Color patch 23 Scanned Slant Grid C 24 Scanned Slant Grid D 4429 Select Copy Data Security 001 Coping ENG 0 to 3 3 1 step 002 Scanning 003 Fax Operation 4450 Scan Image Path Selection 001 Black Subtraction ON OFF 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path 002 SH ON OFF 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 ON 1 OFF Uses or does not use the shad...

Page 452: ...ENG 008 Copy Y Photo ENG 4505 ACC Cor Bright Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern 001 Text K ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 002 Text C ENG 003 Text M ENG 004 Text Y ENG 005 Photo K ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 006 Photo C ENG 007 Photo M ENG 008 Photo Y ENG 4506 ACC Cor Dark Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern 5 System Maintenance 450 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROL...

Page 453: ...on R G B ENG Specifies the printer vector correction value 0 to 255 0 1 step 005 008 YR Phase Option R G B 009 012 YG Phase Option R G B 013 016 GY Phase Option R G B 017 020 GC Phase Option R G B 021 024 CG Phase Option R G B 025 028 CB Phase Option R G B 029 032 BC Phase Option R G B 033 036 BM Phase Option R G B 037 040 MB Phase Option R G B 041 044 MR Phase Option R G B 045 048 RM Phase Option...

Page 454: ...Execution 001 HP Detection Enable Executes the AGC 002 HP Detection Disable 4609 Gray Balance Set R 001 Book Read 512 to 511 46 1 digit step 002 DF Read 512 to 511 46 1 digit step 4610 Gray Balance Set G 001 Book Read 512 to 511 20 1 digit step 002 DF Read 4611 Gray Balance Set B 001 Book Read 512 to 511 28 1 digit step 002 DF Read 4623 Black Level Fine Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd si...

Page 455: ... 002 Latest GO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4625 Black Level Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal 001 Latest BE Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step...

Page 456: ...ntroller for Red 001 Latest RE Color 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 Latest RO Color 4632 Digital Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 001 Latest GE Color 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 Latest GO Color 4633 Digital Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue 001 Latest BE Color 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 Latest ...

Page 457: ...G Displays the black offset value for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4655 Black Level Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value GE Color ENG Displays the black offset value for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Last Correct Value GO Color ENG...

Page 458: ...Adjustment Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 001 Last Correct Value GE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4660 Analog Gain Adjustment Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue 001 Last Correct Value BE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4661 Digital Gain Adjustment RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value...

Page 459: ...0 1 digit step 4674 Black Level Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Factory Setting GE Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Factory Setting GO Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd green s...

Page 460: ...0 1 digit step 4679 Analog Gain Adjustment Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue 001 Factory Setting BE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4680 Digital Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 001 Latest RE Color ENG 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 Latest RO Color ENG 4681 Digital Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the ampl...

Page 461: ... Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 RE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 RO 4691 White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 GE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 GO 4692 White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 BE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 BO 4693 Black Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the black lev...

Page 462: ...scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or off Press OFF to stop this free run Otherwise the free run lasts 002 Lamp ON 4804 Home Position Operation 001 Executes the scanner HP detection 4806 Carriage Move 001 Moves the carriage from the scanner home position Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass Therefore do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance 4807 SBU ...

Page 463: ... R DATA2 ENG Photo C Patch Level 17 8 bit 005 G DATA2 ENG Photo M Patch Level 17 8 bit 006 B DATA2 ENG Photo Y Patch Level 17 8 bit 4918 Manual Gamma Adj Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode See Printer Gamma Correction in the Replacement and Adjustment for how to use 009 Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen 001 to 008 For details see the Printer Gamma Correcti...

Page 464: ...strongest sensitivity 002 Range Selection ENG Selects the range level of Highlight correction 0 to 9 4 1 step 0 weakest skew correction 9 strongest skew correction 4994 Text Photo Detection Level Adj Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF 001 High Compression PDF ENG 0 to 2 1 1 step 0 Text priority 1 Normal 2 Photo priority 4996 White Paper Detect Level Adjust...

Page 465: ...e is negative or positive 001 Counter Method CTL 0 or 1 1 0 Developments 1 Prints 5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Enables or disables the toner refill detection display 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 Alphanumeric 0 ON 1 OFF 5055 Display IP Address Display or does not display the IP address on the operation panel 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 5056 Coverage Counter Display Display or does not display the covera...

Page 466: ... M CTL 003 PCU C CTL 004 PCU Y CTL 005 Development Unit Bk CTL 0 or 1 0 0 No display 1 Display 006 Development Unit M CTL 007 Development Unit C CTL 008 Development Unit Y CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt CTL 0 or 1 0 0 No display 1 Display 014 Image Transfer Cleaning CTL 015 Fusing Unit CTL 016 PTR Unit CTL 017 Toner Collection Bottle CTL 018 Fusing Roller Heating Roller CTL 019 Fusing Belt CTL 5066 P...

Page 467: ...t Unit C CTL 008 Development Unit Y CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt CTL 0 Service or 1 User 014 Image Transfer Cleaning CTL 0 Service or 1 User 015 Fusing Unit CTL 0 Service or 1 User 016 PTR Unit CTL 0 Service or 1 User 017 Toner Collection Bottle CTL 0 Service or 1 User 018 Fusing Roller Heating Roller CTL 0 Service or 1 User 019 Fusing Belt CTL 0 Service or 1 User 5073 Supply Part Replacement Opera...

Page 468: ...g accounting 5118 Disable Copying CTL 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled 001 This program disables copying 5120 Mode Clear Opt Counter Removal CTL 0 Yes removed 1 Standby installed but not used 2 No not removed 001 This program updates the information on the optional counter When you install or remove an optional counter check the settings 5121 Counter Up Timing CTL 0 Feed 1 Exit 001 Thisprogramspecifieswh...

Page 469: ... This program specifies the switch that selects an application program 5167 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device 001 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Automatic printing 1 No automatic printing 5169 CE Login If you will change...

Page 470: ... Numbering CTL This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers A value moves the page number positions to the left edge A value moves the page number positions to the right edge 003 Duplex Printout Right Left Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 5302 Set Time Adjusts the RTC real time clock time setting for the local time zone E...

Page 471: ...aturday 5th and 6th digits The hour 00 to 23 7th digit The length of the advanced time 0 to 9 1 hour step 8th digit The length of the advanced time 0 to 5 10 minutes step For example 3500010 EU default The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0 00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 004 Rule Set End Specifies the end setting for the sum...

Page 472: ...ut Setting 001 Lockout On Off CTL Switches on off the lock on the local address book account 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Lockout Threshold CTL Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts 1 to 10 5 1 003 Cancellation On Off CTL Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off n...

Page 473: ...in 5415 Password Attack 001 Permissible Number CTL Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to the system 0 to 100 30 1 attempt 002 Detect Time CTL Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected 1 to 10 5 1 sec 5416 Access Information 001 Access User Max Num CTL Limits the number of users used by the access e...

Page 474: ...e speed of certificationwhenanexcessivenumberofaccess attempts have been detected 0 to 9 3 1 sec 004 Attack Max Num CTL Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 50 to 200 200 1 attempt 5420 User Authentication These settings should be done with the System Administra...

Page 475: ... 0 1 0 On 1 Off 021 Fax CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 031 Scanner CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 041 Printer CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 051 SD...

Page 476: ...n failure occurs 0 or 1 1 1 1 On 0 Off 5501 PM Alarm CTL 001 PM Alarm Level 0 to 9999 0 1 step 0 Alarm off 1 to 9999 Alarm goes off when Value 1 to 9999 x 1000 PM counter 002 Original Count Alarm 0 or 1 0 0 No alarm sounds 1 Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the ARDF 10 000 5504 Jam Alarm CTL 001 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not...

Page 477: ...e notifying a supply call via the Remote 001 Paper Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 002 Staple Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 003 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 005 Drum Life Remain Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 006 Waste Toner Bottle Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 080 Toner Call Timing Changes the timing of the Toner Supply Call via the Remote when the following conditions occur 0 At replacement 1 At near end 128 Interval Oth...

Page 478: ...ts the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 013 Door Open Time Length 3 to 30 10 1 step Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call This setting is enabled only when SP5 508 004 is set to 1 5515 SC Alarm Setting With Remote in use these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when...

Page 479: ... Gamma Control Point Execute 004 Get Factory Default Recalls the factory settings 005 Set Factory Default Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings 006 Restore Original Value Recalls the previous settings 5611 Toner Color in 2C 001 B C ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 002 B M ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128...

Page 480: ...e blue signal in two color mode 5618 Color Mode Display Selection 001 CTL 0 or 1 1 0 ACS Colour Black White Two Colour Single colour 1 ACD Full Colour Black White Selects the color selection display on the LCD Memory Clear SP5 801 The following tables list the items that are cleared The serial number information meter charge setting and meter charge counters SP8 581 582 583 584 and 586 are not cle...

Page 481: ...g except for setting of Energy Saver I F Setup I O Buffer and I O Timeout PCL Menu 009 Scanner Application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes 010 Web Service Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails and initializes the job login ID 011 NCS All setting of Network Setup User Menu NCS Network Control Service 012 R Fax Initializes ...

Page 482: ...ble in this section 5805 Anti Condensation Heater 0 Default setting The heater is on when the main switch is off or when the machine is in energy saver mode 1 The heater is always on 001 0 OFF 1 ON ENG 0 or 1 0 5810 SC Reset Resets a type A service call condition Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code 001 Fusing SC Reset 5811 Machine Serial Machine Serial Number Display 002 Di...

Page 483: ...alphabetic characters can be input 5816 Remote Service CTL 001 I F Setting Selects the remote service setting 0 to 2 2 1 step 0 Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 Remote service on 002 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Start of the service 1 End of the service NOTE This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 003 Function Flag Ena...

Page 484: ...RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step 011 Port 80 Enable Enables disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method 0 or 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 013 RFU Remote Frimware Update Timing Selects the RFU timing 0 or 1 1 0 RFU is executed whenever update request is received 1 RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode 021 Functio...

Page 485: ...ver used for communication between Embedded RC Gate N and the gateway Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address The address is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate N The address display is limited to 128 characters Characters beyond the 128 character are ignored This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report 064 Proxy Port Number ThisSPsetsthepor...

Page 486: ...presently being updated 2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update 3 Thecertificationupdatefailed andtheGWURLisbeingnotifiedofthefailedupdate 4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL 11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progr...

Page 487: ...or certification update in progress The current certification has expired 2 An SSL error notification has been issued Issued after the certification has expired 3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification 4 Notification of a common certification without ID2 5 Notification that no certification was issued 6 Notification that GW URL does not exist 069 CERT Up ...

Page 488: ...Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 052 ECP Centro Enables or disables ECP Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This SP is activated only when SP5 828 50 is set to 1 065 Job Spooling Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 066 Job Spooling Clear Start Time Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on 0 ON Data is cleared 1 OFF A...

Page 489: ...the Telnet protocol 0 or 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 091 Web 0 OFF 1 ON Enables or disables the Web operation 0 or 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Link Local Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each Main SP Table...

Page 490: ...f a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 158 IPv6 Gateway Address This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet orwirelessLAN 802 11b TheIPv6addressconsistsofatotal 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 236 Web Item visible Disp...

Page 491: ...L name are 31 characters 240 Web Link1 URL This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters 241 Web Link1 visible Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system 0 to 1 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 242 Web Link2 Name Same as 239 243 Web Link2 URL Same as 240 244 Web Link2 visible Sam...

Page 492: ...isplayed or selected 002 Panel Setting 0 Displayed 1 Not displayed Displays or does not display the capture function buttons 5836 71 to 5836 78 Copier and Printer Document Reduction The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 071 Reduction for Copy Color 0 1to...

Page 493: ...s SP is not used in this model 082 Format for Copy B W Text 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 083 Format Copy B W Other 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 084 Format for Printer Color 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR This SP is not used in this model 085 Format for Printer B W 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 086 Format for Printer B W HQ 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR...

Page 494: ...t Reso Rate Switch This is basically adjusted by the remote system 121 Reso Copy Color 0 to 3 2 1 step Selects the resolution for color copy mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 300dpi 2 150dpi 3 75dpi 122 Reso Copy Mono 0 to 5 3 1 step Selects the resolution for BW copy mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 1...

Page 495: ...s is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi 128 Reso Scan Mono This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 to 6 3 1 step Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi 5840 IEEE 802 11 5840 006 Channel MAX CTL Sets the maxim...

Page 496: ...AS 1 to 11 1 1 step AS 1 to 14 14 1 step 5840 008 Transmission Speed CTL 0 x 00 to 0 x FF 0 x FF to Auto 0 x FF to Auto Default 0 x 11 55M Fix 0 x 10 48M Fix 0 x 0F 36M Fix 0 x 0E 18M Fix 0 x 0D 12M Fix 0 x 0B 9M Fix 0 x 0A 6M Fix 0 x 07 11M Fix 0 x 05 5 5M Fix 0 x 08 1M Fix 0 x 13 0 x FE reserved 0 x 12 72M reserved 0 x 09 22M reserved 5840 011 WEP Key Select CTL Selects the WEP key 00 to 11 00 1...

Page 497: ...played only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 5840 045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 5841 Supply Name Setting 001 Toner Name Setting Black CTL Specifiessupplynames Theseappearon the screen when the user presses the Inquiry button in the user tools s...

Page 498: ...oduct ID CTL Displays the product ID 004 Dev Release Num CTL Displays the device release version number 005 Fixed USB Port CTL Displays the fixed USB Port 006 PnP Model Name CTL Displays the PnP Model Name 007 PnP Serial Number CTL Displays the PnP Serial Number 100 Notify Unsupport CTL Displays a message of the unspported USB device for the USB host slot 0 or 1 1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 5845 ...

Page 499: ...s SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting 009 Delivery Server Model 0 to 4 0 1 step Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I O device 0 Unknown 1 SG1 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SG2 Provided 4 SG2 Package 010 Delivery Svr Capability 0 to 255 0 1 step Bit7 1 Comment information exits Changes the capability of the registered that the...

Page 500: ...1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0 Not used 013 014 015 016 017 018 022 Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error 0 to 1 0 0 Disable 1 Enable 5846 UCS Settings CTL 010 LDAP Search Timeout 1 to 255 60 1 step Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server 5 System Maintenance 498 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 501: ...However at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator 6 Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041 After this SP executes successfully any user can access the address book 043 Addr Book Media Displays the slot number where an address book data is in 0 to 30 1 0 Unconfirmed 1 SD Slot 1 2 SD Slot 2 4 USB Flash ROM 20 HDD 30 Nothing 047 Initialize Local Addr...

Page 502: ... Checks both upper lower case characters 1 Japan Only 2 Japan Only 3 Japan Only 4 to 7 Not Used 062 Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 0 1 step This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the s...

Page 503: ...Copy Color 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 6x 5 1 8x 002 Rate for Copy B W Text 003 Rate for Copy B W Other 004 Rate for Printer Color 005 Rate for Printer B W 006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 6x 5 1 8x 007 Rate for Printer B W 1200dpi 0 1x 1 1 2x 2 1 3x 3 1 4x 4 1 6x 5 1 8x 021 Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sen...

Page 504: ...4 bits 011 Access Ctrl Device management Lower 4 bits 022 Access Ctrl uadministration Lower 4bits 210 Setting LogType Job1 211 Setting LogType Job2 212 Setting LogType Access 213 Setting Primary Srv 214 Setting Secondary Srv 215 Setting Start Time 216 Setting Interval Time 217 Setting Timing 5849 Installation Date CTL 001 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst ...

Page 505: ...he debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on 002 Target 2 HDD 3 SD 2 HDD 3 SD Card Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5 858 are satisfied 2 to 3 2 1 step 005 Save to HDD Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting exist...

Page 506: ... SC specified by number Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes 001 Engine SC Error Turns on off the debug save for SC codes generated by printer engine errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Controller SC Error Turns on off the debug save for SC codes generated by GW controller errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 003 Any SC Error 0 to 65535 0 1 step 004 Jam 0 OFF 1 ON Turns on off the debug ...

Page 507: ...ring reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time 021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance 0 to 1 1 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 No 1 Yes 022 SMTP Auth From Field Replacement 0 to 1 0 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the ...

Page 508: ...tification When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair you must execute the Initiralize 003 and Writing 001 just after the new board replacement NOTE Turn off and on the main power switch after the Initiralize 003 and Writing 001 have been done 5873 SD Card Appli Move 001 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD c...

Page 509: ...curity Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit Press EXECUTE on the operation panel Then turn the machine off and on 002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit 5887 SD Get Counter This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated 001 CTL This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot The operation stores The file is stored in a folder created in the root di...

Page 510: ...lay Maker Model Name 001 Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug Play This information is stored in the NVRAM If the NVRAM is defective these names should be registered again After selecting press the Original Type key and key at the same time When the setting is completed the beeper sounds five times 5913 Switchover Permission Time 002 Print Application Timer CTL 3 to 30 3...

Page 511: ...is installed 001 Cherry Server CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Lite 1 Full 5987 Mech Counter Protection 001 0 OFF 1 ON This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 occurs 5990 SP print mode Prints out the SMC sheets 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Pr...

Page 512: ... 0 0 1 mm step 6007 ADF INPUT Check Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF Only Bit 0 is used for ADF input check see Input Check in this section 6008 ADF OUTPUT Check Activates the electrical components for functional check It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time see Output Check in this section 6009 ADF Free Run Performs a DF free ...

Page 513: ...tance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack 005 B5T ENG 008 LG T ENG 009 LT T ENG 012 Other ENG 6137 Finisher Free Run Execute the finisher free run 001 Free Run 1 ENG 0 to 1 0 1 step 002 Free Run 2 003 Free Run 3 004 Free Run 4 6145 FIN BLO INPUT Check Finisher Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher see Input Check in this section 6146 F...

Page 514: ... on the screen but can be seen on the SMC logging outputs 001 Latest CTL 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 7404 SC991 History Logs the SC Code 991 detected The 10 most recently detected SC Code 991 are not displayed on the screen but can be seen on the SMC logging outputs 5 System Maintenance 512 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROL...

Page 515: ...st 8 010 Latest 9 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of jams detected 001 CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step 7504 Paper Jam Location ON On check OFF Off Check Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected Main SP Tables 7 513 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 516: ...ON CTL For details p 724 Jam Detection 018 Fusing Entrance ON CTL 019 Fusing Exit ON CTL 020 Paper Exit ON CTL 021 1 bin Eixt ON CTL 025 Duplex Exit ON CTL 026 Duplex Entrance ON In CTL 027 Duplex Entrance ON Out CTL 028 Inverter Sensor ON In CTL For details p 724 Jam Detection 029 Inverter Sensor ON Out CTL 047 Paper Feed Sensor 1 Off CTL 048 Paper Feed Sensor 2 Off CTL 049 Paper Feed Sensor 3 Of...

Page 517: ...ff Out CTL 068 Inverter Sensor Off In CTL 069 Inverter Sensor Off Out CTL 230 FIN Paper Exit Signal Error CTL For details p 724 Jam Detection 240 FIN Entrance Sensor On CTL 241 FIN Entrance Sensor Off CTL 242 FIN Paper Exit CTL 243 FIN Jogger Motor CTL 244 FIN Shift Roller Motor CTL 245 FIN Position Roller Motor CTL 246 FIN Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL 247 FIN Output Tray Motor CTL 248 FIN Stapler M...

Page 518: ...08 Reverse ON CTL 054 Registration OFF CTL 058 Reverse OFF CTL 7506 Paper Jam Size Displays the number of jams according to the paper size 006 A5 LEF CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step 044 HLT LEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 142 B5 SEF 164 LG SEF 166 LT SEF 172 HLT SEF 255 Others 7507 Plotter Jam History Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams 5 System Maintenance 516 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃ...

Page 519: ...umber of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit PM counters click up based on the number of A4 LT LEF size sheets printed When a unit is replaced the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed Then the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 1 to 21 and is reset to 0 The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replace...

Page 520: ...revolution step When a unit is replaced the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed Then the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 31 to 49 and is reset to 0 The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 31 to 49 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034 Rotation PCU...

Page 521: ...ounter is based on rotations not prints If the number of rotations reaches the limit the machine enters the end condition for that unit If the print count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the R counter is still less than 100 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y 065 Rotation Development Unit Bk 066 Rotation Devel...

Page 522: ...s the limit the machine enters the end condition for that unit If the revolution count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the Page counter is still less than 100 091 Page PCU Bk ENG 0 to 255 1 step 092 Page PCU C 093 Page PCU M 094 Page PCU Y 095 Page Development Unit Bk 096 Page Development Unit C 097 Page Development Unit M 098 Page Development Unit Y...

Page 523: ...03 to 0 001 Paper 002 PCU Bk 003 PCU C 004 PCU M 005 PCU Y 006 PCU All 007 Development Unit Bk 008 Development Unit C 009 Development Unit M 010 Development Unit Y 011 Development Unit All 016 Developer All 017 Image Transfer Belt 018 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit 019 Fusing Unit 020 Fusing Roller 021 Fusing Belt 022 PTR Unit 023 Toner Collection Bottle 100 All Main SP Tables 7 521 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONT...

Page 524: ... to 65 535 when dust was detected on the scanning glass of the ARDF or resets the dust detection counter Counting is done only if SP4 020 1 ARDF Scan Glass Dust Check is switched on 001 Dust Detection Counter CTL 0 to 9999 1 step 002 Dust Detection Clear Counter CTL 0 to 9999 1 step 7853 Replacement Counter Displays the PM parts replacement number 001 PCU Bk 002 PCU C 003 PCU M 004 PCU Y 005 Devel...

Page 525: ...nters Color 1 Color 2 and Color 3 A 5 default is adjustable with SP7855 001 B 20 default is adjustable with SP7855 002 The setting value B must be set larger than A The total numbers of printouts BW printing plus color printing for each coverage range are displayed with the following SPs Color1 counter SP8601 021 Color2 counter SP8601 022 Color3 counter SP8601 023 001 Coverage Range 1 CTL 1 to 200...

Page 526: ...ber of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units 0 to 9999999 0 1 page step 001 Page PCU Bk 002 Page PCU C 003 Page PCU M 004 Page PCU Y 005 Page Development Unit Bk 006 Page Development Unit C 007 Page Development Unit M 008 Page Development Unit Y 013 Page Image Transfer 014 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 0...

Page 527: ...Image Transfer 044 Rotation Image Transfer Cleaning 045 Rotation Fusing Unit 046 Rotation Fusing Roller 047 Rotation Fusing Belt 048 Rotation PTR Unit 049 MeasurementToner Collection Bottle 061 to 079 Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge 0 to 255 0 1 step 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y 065 Rotation...

Page 528: ...ount 100 where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part and Yield count is the recommended yield 0 to 255 0 1 step 091 Page PCU Bk 092 Page PCU C 093 Page PCU M 094 Page PCU Y 095 Page Development Unit Bk 096 Page Development Unit C 097 Page Development Unit M 098 Page Development Unit Y 103 Page Image Transfer 104 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 105 Page Fusing Unit 106 Page F...

Page 529: ... ENG 009 Recycle Counter ENG 010 Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7932 Toner Bottle C Displays the toner bottle information for C Main SP Tables 7 527 5 CÓPIA ...

Page 530: ...te ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7933 Toner Bottle M Displays the toner bottle information for M 5 System Maintenance 528 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTRO...

Page 531: ...Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7934 Toner Bottle Y Displays the toner bottle information for Y Main SP Tables 7 529 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 532: ...Counter ENG 010 Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7935 Toner Bottle Log 1 Bk 5 System Maintenance 530 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 533: ...ate 011 Attachment Total Counter 012 Refill Information 013 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Bk 014 Attachment Date 015 Attachment Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Bk 018 Attachment Date 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7936 Toner Bottle Log 1 M 001 Serial No ENG Displays the toner...

Page 534: ...e 015 Attachment Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for M 018 Attachment Date 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7937 Toner Bottle Log 1 C 001 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for C 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bot...

Page 535: ...ate 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7938 Toner Bottle Log 1 Y 001 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Y 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Y 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information 009 Serial No ENG Displays the toner b...

Page 536: ...Information 7950 Unit Replacement Date Displays the replacement date of each PM unit 001 Image Transfer Belt ENG 002 Image Transfer Cleaning ENG 003 Paper Transfer Unit ENG 004 Fusing Unit ENG 005 Fusing Roller ENG 006 Fusing Belt ENG 013 PCU Bk ENG 014 PCU C ENG 015 PCU M ENG 016 PCU Y ENG 017 Development Unit Bk ENG 018 Development Unit C ENG 019 Development Unit M ENG 020 Development Unit Y ENG...

Page 537: ...Development Unit Y 013 Page Image Transfer Belt 014 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034 Rotation PCU Y 035 Rotation Development Unit Bk 036 Rotation Development Unit C 037 Rotation Development Unit M 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 039 Rotation Developer Bk Main...

Page 538: ...999 200696000 1000 mm step 002 Rotation Image Transfer Cleaning ENG 0 to 999999999 150522000 1000 mm step 003 Rotation Fusing Unit ENG 0 to 999999999 253311000 1000 mm step 004 Rotation Fusing Roller ENG 005 Rotation Fusing Belt ENG 006 Rotation Paper Transfer Unit ENG 0 to 999999999 150522000 1000 mm step 007 Measurement Tone Collection Bottle ENG 0 to 999999999 300000 1000 mg step 011 Page Image...

Page 539: ...U M ENG 024 Day Threshold PCU Y ENG 025 Day Threshold Development Unit Bk ENG Adjuststhethresholddayofthenearendforeach PM unit 1 to 30 15 1 day step These threshold days are used for Remote alarms 026 Day Threshold Development Unit C ENG 027 Day Threshold Development Unit M ENG 028 Day Threshold Development Unit Y ENG 033 Day Threshold Image Transfer Belt ENG 034 Day Threshold Image Transfer Clea...

Page 540: ...053 Page PCU Y 054 Page Development Unit Bk ENG 055 Page Development Unit C ENG 056 Page Development Unit M ENG 057 Page Development Unit Y ENG 062 Day Threshold PTR Unit ENG Adjuststhethresholddayofthenearendforeach PM unit 1 to 30 15 1 day step These threshold days are used for Remote alarms 063 Day Thresh Toner Collection Bottle 7953 Operation Env Log PCU Bk Displays the PCU rotation distance i...

Page 541: ...0 H 30 010 15 T 25 30 H 55 011 15 T 25 55 H 80 ENG 0 to 99999999 1 mm step 012 15 T 25 80 H 100 013 25 T 30 0 H 30 014 25 T 30 30 H 55 015 25 T 30 55 H 80 016 25 T 30 80 H 100 017 30 T 0 H 30 018 30 T 30 H 55 019 30 T 55 H 80 020 30 T 80 H 100 7954 Operation Env Log Clear Clears the operation environment log 001 Main SP Tables 7 539 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 542: ... is the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Service Table make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean ...

Page 543: ...s to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the nam...

Page 544: ...r an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g border removal adding stamps page numbers etc K Black YMCK LS Local Storage Refers to the document server LSize Large paper Size Mag Magnification MC One color monochrome NRS New Remote Service which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely NRS is used ov...

Page 545: ... only This machine is under development and currently not available Rez Resolution SC Service Code Error SC code displayed Scn Scan Sim Simplex Simplex printing on 1 side S to Email Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow Ma...

Page 546: ...hen a fax is received to fax memory the F counter increments but the L counter does not the document server is not used A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F counter the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations If one transmission generates an error then the broadcast will not be coun...

Page 547: ...ter increments When a network application sends data to the document server the O counter increments When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server the O counter increments When a fax is sent to the document server the F counter increments 8 021 T Pjob LS CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L...

Page 548: ...l CTL 8 037 O Pjob DesApl CTL When documents already stored on the document server are printed the count for the application that started the print job is incremented When the print job is started from a network application Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments 8 041 T TX Jobs LS CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later ...

Page 549: ...9 0 1 These SPs total the finishing methods The finishing method is specified by the application 8 062 C FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application 8 063 F FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application Note Finishing f...

Page 550: ... Number of jobs started in Staple mode 8 06x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode If the machine is in staple mode the Staple counter also increments 8 06x 5 Z Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding Z fold 8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode When Punch is set for a print job the P counter increments See SP8 064 6 8 06x 7 O...

Page 551: ...w at the operation panel by the number of pages in the job 8 077 O Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs Web Image Monitor Palm 2 etc by size based on the number of pages in the job 8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages 8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages 8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages 8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pag...

Page 552: ... to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent by fax directly on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 8 11x 1 B W 8 11x 2 Color These counters count jobs not pages This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application including documents stored on the document server If the mode is changed during the job ...

Page 553: ...k and white scanned and attached to e mail without storing the original on the document server 8 13x 1 B W 8 13x 2 Color 8 13x 3 ACS These counters count jobs not pages If the job is stored on the document server after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be...

Page 554: ... during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 8 151 T Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs c...

Page 555: ...s counted from when it is registered for sending not when it is sent 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identical counts 8 163 F PCFAX TX Jobs CTL This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier 8 171 T Deliv Jobs WSD CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS 0 to 9999999 0 ...

Page 556: ...of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored the C count is 6 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages the L count is 6 8 201 T LSize Scan PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper scanned for fax transmission are not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools...

Page 557: ...thenumberofpagesfedthroughtheADFforfrontandbacksidescanning 8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side ...

Page 558: ...sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is enabled In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3 8 241 T Scan PGS Org CTL 0 to 9999...

Page 559: ...s 8 24x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 8 24x 5 Map Yes Yes No No Yes 8 24x 6 Normal Detail Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 7 Fine Super Fine Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 8 Binary Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 9 Grayscale Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 10 Color Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 11 Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from...

Page 560: ...pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 261 T Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 262 C Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 265 S Scn PGS Color CTL 8 266 L Scn PGS ColCr CTL 8 26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation panel 8 26x 2 Color Erase 8 26x 3 B...

Page 561: ...se totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 8 303 F Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 8 305 S Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned b...

Page 562: ... 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time SP8 311 and SP8 315 perform identical counts 8 31x 1 1200dpi 8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi 8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi 8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi 8 31x 5 199dpi Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted The Fax application d...

Page 563: ...lank pages inserted as document covers chapter title sheets and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode service summaries engine maintenance reports etc Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam 8 391 LSize PrtPGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count pages printed on paper siz...

Page 564: ...e SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application 8 424 P PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application 8 425 S PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the num...

Page 565: ...hese counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3...

Page 566: ...e total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications 8 43x 1 Cover Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2 8 43x 2 Series Book The number of pages printed in series one side or printed as a book with booklet right left pagination 8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were ap...

Page 567: ...hin the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 447 O PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other Standard 8 44x 255 Other Custom These counters do not distinguish between...

Page 568: ...GS Ppr Type CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted Duringduplexprinting pagesprinte...

Page 569: ...ycled 8 46x 3 Special 8 46x 4 Thick 8 46x 5 Normal Back 8 46x 6 Thick Back 8 46x 7 OHP 8 46x 8 Other 8 471 PrtPGS Mag CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed 8 471 1 49 8 471 2 50 to 99 8 471 3 100 8 471 4 101 to 200 8 471 5 201 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external...

Page 570: ... same results as this SP is limited to the Print application 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 491 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by each application 8 492 C PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 493 F PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 496 L PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 497 O PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 49x 1 B W 8 49x 2 Single Color 8 49x 3 Two Color 8 49x 4 Full Color 8 501 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL Th...

Page 571: ...5 R16 8 514 6 GL GL2 8 514 7 R55 8 514 8 RTIFF 8 514 9 PDF 8 514 10 PCL5e 5c 8 514 11 PCL XL 8 514 12 IPDL C 8 514 13 BM Links Japan Only 8 514 14 Other 8 514 15 IPDS SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are not counted 8 521 T PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the tota...

Page 572: ...r of pages printed by the Print application 8 525 S PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application 8 526 L PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 52x 1 Sort 8 52x 2 Stack 8 52x 3 Staple 8 52...

Page 573: ...SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total Full Color 8 581 3 B W Single Color 8 581 4 Development CMY 8 581 5 Development K 8 581 6 Copy Color 8 581 7 Copy B W 8 581 8 Print Color 8 581 9 Print B...

Page 574: ...lication broken down by color output 8 582 1 B W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 583 F Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output 8 583 1 B W 8 583 2 Single Color 8 584 P Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output 8 584 1 B W 8 58...

Page 575: ...e totals are for Other O applications only 8 591 1 A3 DLT 8 591 2 Duplex 8 601 Coverage Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode 8 601 1 B W 8 601 2 Color 8 601 11 B W Printing Pages 8 601 12 Color Printing Pages 8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1 8 601 22 Coverage Counter 2 8 601 23 Coverage Counter 3 8 617 SDK Apl...

Page 576: ...vided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination 8 641 T IFAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0...

Page 577: ...color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for the Scan application only 8 65x 1 B W 8 65x 2 Color The count for B W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD If the job is cancelled before it is stored the pages are not counted If Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to 5 addresses the count is 10 the pages are sent to the same SMTP server togethe...

Page 578: ... confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server 8 671 T Deliv PGS PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC with the Scan and LS applications 8 675 S Deliv PGS PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan to PC with the Scan application 8 67x 1 B W 8 67x 2 Color 8 681 ...

Page 579: ...8 696 L TX PGS LS CTL Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merged for sending the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast the F count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination 8 701 TX PGS Port CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count t...

Page 580: ...PGS Media CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 735 S Scan PGS Media CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner mode x 1 B W x 2 Color 8 741 RX PGS Port CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them 8 741 1 PSTN 1 8 741 2 PSTN 2 8 741 3 PSTN 3 8 741 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 741 5 Network 5 System Maintenance 578 5 CÓPIA ...

Page 581: ...number of yellow toner bottles 8 781 3 M The number of magenta toner bottles 8 781 4 C The number of cyan toner bottles 8 791 LS Memory Remain CTL This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents 0 to 100 0 1 8 801 Toner Remain CTL 0 to 100 0 1 These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color This SP allows the user to check the toner supp...

Page 582: ... 8 851 22 3 to 4 Y 8 851 42 8 to 10 Y 8 851 23 3 to 4 M 8 851 43 8 to 10 M 8 851 24 3 to 4 C 8 851 44 8 to 10 C 8 861 CVr Cnt 11 20 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11 to 20 8 861 1 BK 8 861 2 Y 8 861 3 M 8 861 4 C 8 871 CVr Cnt 21 30 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the cover...

Page 583: ...nt of the remaining current toner for each color 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C 8 901 Page Toner_Prev1 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color 8 901 1 BK 8 901 2 Y 8 901 3 M 8 901 4 C 8 911 Page Toner_Prev2 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color 8 911 1 BK 8 911 2 Y Main...

Page 584: ...s 8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time Does not include time while controller is saving data to HDD while engine is not operating 8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating Includes time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes 8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing 8 941 4 Low Po...

Page 585: ...n registrations 8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations 8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX 8 951 6 F Code F Code box registrations 8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 9 Printer Program Printer...

Page 586: ...or 8 999 10 Fax Print BW 8 999 12 A3 DLT 8 999 13 Duplex 8 999 14 Coverage Color 8 999 15 Coverage BW 8 999 16 Coverage Color Print Page 8 999 17 Coverage BW Print Page 8 999 101 Transmission Total Color 8 999 102 Transmission Total BW 8 999 103 FAX Transmission 8 999 104 Scanner Transmission Color 8 999 105 Scanner Transmission BW 5 System Maintenance 584 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 587: ... remaining 5803 5 1 Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 6 Bypass Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining 5803 7 Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 8 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 9 Paper Exit Full Sensor Paper not full Paper full 5803 10 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 5803 11 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper ...

Page 588: ... SW 2 Front door open Front door closed 5803 26 Right Door Sensor Closed Open 5803 30 Duplex Cover Sensor Closed Open 5803 31 LDU Shutter Sensor Closed Open 5803 32 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Set Not set 5803 33 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Not full Full 5803 34 ITB Unit New Not new New 5803 35 Fusing Fan Lock Normal Lock 5803 36 Fusing Fan 1 Lock Normal Lock 5803 37 Fusing Fan 2 Lock Normal ...

Page 589: ...ted 5803 58 Fusing New New Not new 5803 59 Fusing Destination Set Not set 5803 60 Fusing Set Set Not set 5803 61 Zero cross Signal Not detected Detected 5803 62 Fusing Temperature Detected Not detected 5803 63 1 Bin Set Set Not set 5803 64 1 Bin Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 65 1 Bin Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 66 Side Tray Set Set Not set 5803 67 Upper...

Page 590: ... detected Paper not detected 5803 83 Bank Cover Sensor 1 5803 84 Bank Cover Sensor 2 5803 94 LD OFF Check Factory 5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP 5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close Table 1 Paper Size Switch Tray 1 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Paper size sensor North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 A4 A4 0 1 1 LT LT 1 1 1 Exe Exe 1 1 0 HLT A5 0 0 0 A6 1 0...

Page 591: ... Table 3 Paper Size Switch Tray 3 and 4 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Paper size sensor North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 LG LG 0 0 0 A4 A4 0 1 1 HLT A5 0 1 0 LT LT 1 1 1 Exe Exe 1 1 0 A6 A6 0 0 1 B6 B5 B6 B5 1 0 0 ARDF 6007 Description Reading 0 1 Main SP Tables 9 589 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 592: ...ensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 5 Gathering Roller Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 6 Exit Guide Plate Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 8 Shift Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 9 Shift Tray Full Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 10 Stapler HP Sensor Paper not...

Page 593: ... CMY 182mm s 5804 19 Development Motor CMY 85mm s 5804 24 Drum Motor CMY 260mm s 5804 25 Drum Motor CMY 182mm s 5804 26 Drum Motor CMY 85mm s 5804 31 Feed Motor 364mm s 5804 32 Feed Motor 260mm s 5804 33 Feed Motor 182mm s 5804 34 Feed Motor 85mm s 5804 39 Registration Motor 260mm s 5804 40 Registration Motor 182mm s 5804 41 Registration Motor 85mm s 5804 46 Inverter Motor CW 468mm s 5804 47 Inver...

Page 594: ...otor CCW 182mm s 5804 72 Duplex Motor CCW 85mm s 5804 77 Vertical Feed Motor 364mm s 5804 78 Vertical Feed Motor 260mm s 5804 79 Vertical Feed Motor 182mm s 5804 80 Vertical Feed Motor 85mm s 5804 83 Transfer Belt Contact Motor CW 5804 84 Transfer Belt Contact Motor CCW 5804 85 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Motor CW 5804 86 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Motor CCW 5804 87 Toner Collection Motor CW ...

Page 595: ...804 105 Polygon Motor Middle Speed 5804 106 Polygon Motor Low Speed 5804 107 Fusing Fan 2 H 5804 108 Fusing Fan 2 L 5804 109 Fusing Front Fan H 5804 110 Fusing Front Fan L 5804 111 Toner Supply Fan 5804 112 Drive Unit Fan 5804 113 Development Fan 1 5804 114 Development Fan 2 5804 115 Development Fan 5804 116 Laser Unit Fan 5804 117 Feed Fan 5804 118 PSU Fan 5804 120 Development Clutch 5804 121 By ...

Page 596: ...velopment M 5804 136 PP Development C 5804 137 PP Development K 5804 138 PP D 5804 139 PP T1 Y 5804 140 PP T1 M 5804 141 PP T1 C 5804 142 PP T1 K 5804 143 PP T2 5804 144 PP T2 5804 147 PP Charge AC Y 260mm s 5804 148 PP Charge AC Y 182mm s 5804 149 PP Charge AC Y 85mm s 5804 154 PP Charge AC M 260mm s 5804 155 PP Charge AC M 182mm s 5804 156 PP Charge AC M 85mm s 5804 161 PP Charge AC C 260mm s 5 ...

Page 597: ...185 TM P Sensor Front Y 5804 186 P Sensor M 5804 187 TM P Sensor Center C 5804 188 TM P Sensor Rear K 5804 189 PCL FC 5804 190 PCL BK 5804 191 Toner End Sensor 5V CTL 5804 192 RFID ON OFF K 5804 193 RFID ON OFF C 5804 194 RFID ON OFF M 5804 195 RFID ON OFF Y 5804 196 RFID COM ON K 5804 197 RFID COM ON C 5804 198 RFID COM ON M 5804 199 RFID COM ON Y 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 216 LD1 K Main SP Tabl...

Page 598: ...Motor 2 364mm s 5804 230 Bank Motor 2 260mm s 5804 231 Bank Motor 2 182mm s 5804 232 Bank Motor 2 136mm s 5804 233 Bank Motor 2 85mm s 5804 234 Bank Motor 3 364mm s 5804 235 Bank Motor 3 260mm s 5804 236 Bank Motor 3 182mm s 5804 237 Bank Motor 3 136mm s 5804 238 Bank Motor 3 85mm s 5804 239 Bank Feed Clutch 1 5804 240 Bank Feed Clutch 2 5804 241 Bank Feed Clutch 3 5804 242 Bank Pick up Solenoid 1...

Page 599: ...8 9 Feed Clutch 6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid Internal Finisher 6146 Display Description 6146 001 Carry Motor Transport Motor 6146 002 Exit Motor 6146 003 Jogger Motor 6146 004 Sft Motor Shift Roller Motor 6146 005 Hitroll Motor Gathering Roller Motor 6146 006 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6146 007 Tray Motor Tray Lift Motor 6146 008 Staple Motor 6146 009 Stopper Solenoid Pick up Solenoid Main SP Tables...

Page 600: ...d in the GW SD slot bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 RPCS PCL Printable area frame border 0 Disable 1 Enable Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area 1001 Bit Switch 002 Bit Switch 2 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU bit 2 Applying a Collate Type 0 Shift Collate 1 Normal Collate A collate type shift or normal will be applied to all jobs that do not explicitely define a collate type Note...

Page 601: ...DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 003 Bit Switch 3 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU bit 2 PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000 In other words the left margin defined in the job usually ESC r0A will be changed to ESC r1A bit 3 DFU bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 00...

Page 602: ...atch occurs bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents of a job 0 Disable 1 Enable If this BitSw is enabled SDK applications will not be able to alter print data This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the GPS Filter Note The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK applications on data bit 3 PS PS Criteria 0 Pattern...

Page 603: ...ages or the last page of an odd paged duplex job are not routed through the duplex unit This could result in problems with letterhead pre printed pages Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 0 1 bit 0 Print path 0 Disable 1 Enable If enabled simplex pages in mixed simplex duplex PS PCL5 jobs only and the last page of a...

Page 604: ...to Detection timeout of jobs submitted via USB or Parallel Port IEEE 1284 0 Disable Immediatel y 1 Enable 10 seconds To be used if PDL auto detection fails A failure of PDL auto detection does not necessarily mean that the job cannot be printed This bit switch tells the device whether to time out immediately default upon failure or to wait 10 seconds bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU bit 3 to 7 DFU 1003 Clear S...

Page 605: ...y for information on each consumable supply 1007 001 Development 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 1007 002 PCU 1007 003 Transfer 1007 004 Int Transfer 1007 005 Transfer Roller 1007 006 Fuser 1007 007 Fuser Oil 1101 ToneCtlSet 1101 001 Tone Factory Recalls a set of gamma settings This can be either a the factory setting b the previous setting or c the current setting 1101 2 Tone Prev 1101 3 Tone Current ...

Page 606: ...fter the gamma adjustment 1103 002 ColorChart 1104 ToneCtlValue Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu 1104 001 Set Black 1 0 to 255 16 1 step 1104 021 Set Cyan 1 1104 041 Set Magenta 1 1104 061 Set Yellow 1 1104 002 Set Black 2 0 to 255 32 1 step 1104 022 Set Cyan 2 1104 042 Set Magenta 2 1104 062 Set Yellow 2 1104 003 Set Black 3 0 to 255 48 1 step 1104 023 Se...

Page 607: ...p 1104 026 Set Cyan 6 1104 046 Set Magenta 6 1104 066 Set Yellow 6 1104 007 Set Black 7 0 to 255 112 1 step 1104 027 Set Cyan 7 1104 047 Set Magenta 7 1104 067 Set Yellow 7 1104 008 Set Black 8 0 to 255 128 1 step 1104 028 Set Cyan 8 1104 048 Set Magenta 8 1104 068 Set Yellow 8 1104 009 Set Black 9 0 to 255 144 1 step 1104 029 Set Cyan 9 1104 049 Set Magenta 9 1104 069 Set Yellow 9 Main SP Tables ...

Page 608: ...104 032 Set Cyan 12 1104 052 Set Magenta 12 1104 072 Set Yellow 12 1104 013 Set Black 13 0 to 255 208 1 step 1104 033 Set Cyan 13 1104 053 Set Magenta 13 1104 073 Set Yellow 13 1104 014 Set Black 14 0 to 255 224 1 step 1104 034 Set Cyan 14 1104 054 Set Magenta 14 1104 074 Set Yellow 14 1104 015 Set Black 15 0 to 255 240 1 step 1104 035 Set Cyan 15 1104 055 Set Magenta 15 1104 075 Set Yellow 15 5 S...

Page 609: ...nt support function 1110 001 0 to 1 1 1 step Scanner Service Mode SP1 xxx System and Others 1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture processing 1004 1 Compression Type CTL 1 to 3 1 1 step 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR 1005 Erase margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin This SP is activated o...

Page 610: ...e Quality 5 to 95 60 1 step 2021 5 Level 5 Lowest Image Quality 5 to 95 20 1 step 2024 Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2024 1 Compression Ratio Normal image CTL 5 to 95 25 1 step 2024 2 Compression Ratio High comp image 5 to 95 20 1 step Test Pattern Printing Printing Test pattern ...

Page 611: ...inting touch Black White on the LCD If you want to use color printing touch Full Colour on the LCD 7 Press the Start key to start the test print 8 After checking the test pattern touch SP Mode on the LCD to return to the SP mode display 9 Reset all settings to the default values 10 Touch Exit twice to exit SP mode No Pattern No Pattern 0 None 12 Independent Pattern 2dot 1 Vertical Line 1dot 13 Ind...

Page 612: ...11 Independent Pattern 1dot 23 Full Dot Pattern 5 System Maintenance 610 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 613: ...trol ADF Main Control Board ADF Finisher Finisher control Finisher Finisher1 NIB DESS Network Interface Security control Flash ROM on the controller board NetworkSupport Security Encryption HDD encryption Data Overwrite Standard Security Encryption unit SD card HDD Format Option Language 16 languages Language firmware Two languages can be selected from 16 languages Operation Panel Language1 Langua...

Page 614: ...on the controller board Printer Scanner Application Feature application Flash ROM on the controller board Scanner Remote Fax Fax control Flash ROM on the controller board RFax WebSys Web Service application Flash ROM on the controller board Web Support WebDocBox Document server application Flash ROM on the controller board Web Uapl Java VM Java VM platform Standard Java VM SD card SDK1 Before You ...

Page 615: ...ber key on the 10 key pad of the operation panel For example when Exit 0 shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen or press the 0 button on the operation panel of the copier Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure Updating Firmware Pr...

Page 616: ...nnot be updated at the same time It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one 8 Touch UpDate or to start the update The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch OpPanel The power on key flashes on and off at 0 5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating The power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished 9 The Update is D...

Page 617: ...Misupdatedsuccessfully In this case insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display Update Procedure for App2Me Provider Follow this procedure to update App 2 Me if a new version is available 1 Push the User Tools key on the operation panel 2 If an administrator setting is registered for the machine Step 3 and S...

Page 618: ...ouch the Extended Feature Settings button twice 14 Touch the Extended Feature Info tab on the LCD 15 Touch the App2Me line 16 Set the setting of the Auto Start to On 17 Touch the Exit button 18 Exit the User Tools Counter settings App2Me and all other running applications on the VM card must be shut down before removing the VM card in order to update the firmware back up NVRAM install the browser ...

Page 619: ... the machine step 5 and 6 are required Otherwise skip to the step 7 6 Push the Login Logout key 7 Login with the administrator user name and password 8 Touch Extended Feature Settings twice on the LCD 9 Touch Uninstall on the LCD 10 Touch the Browser line 11 Confirmation message appears on the LCD 12 Touch Yes to proceed 13 Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD 14 Touch Yes to uninstall the br...

Page 620: ... ROM data on the SD card or data is corrupted 23 Error occurred when ROM update program started Controller program abnormal If the second attempt fails replace controller board 24 SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly or use another SD card 30 No HDD available for stamp data download HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks 31 Data incorrect for continuous download Insert...

Page 621: ...gain or replace the BCU board 42 Operation panel module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the LCDC 43 Stamp data module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the hard disks 44 Controller module download failed Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and tray again or ...

Page 622: ...r about 45 seconds 5 Touch Language Data 2 on the screen or press the 2 key 6 Touch LANG 1 1 or LANG 2 2 Key What it does LANG 1 1 Touch this button on the screen or press the 1 key on the 10 key pad to open the next screen so you can select the 1st language LANG 1 2 Touch this button on the screen or press the 2 key on the 10 key pad to open the next screen so you can select the 2nd language Exit...

Page 623: ... on the screen or press the 7 or 9 key to show more choices The Download Screen opens after you select a language The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows The following show to right of the selection 1 The first column shows the language currently selected 2 The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language The example below shows that the download will replace Japanes...

Page 624: ...nguage is downloading The operation panel switches off The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly 11 After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD switch the copier main power switch off Then remove the SD card from the slot 12 Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation 5 System Maintenance 622 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 625: ...en The machine is ready for normal operation System Settings and Copy Setting Reset System Setting Reset The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press System Settings You must press first 3 Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings 4 Press exit wh...

Page 626: ...r 2 Hold down and then press Copier Document Server Settings You must press first 3 Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings 4 Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset 5 System Maintenance 624 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 627: ...ine automatically starts the self diagnostics just after the power has been turned on 2 SC detection The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power on or during operation The following shows the workflow of the power on and detailed self diagnostics Controller Self Diagnostics 625 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 628: ...5 System Maintenance 626 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 629: ...ollersoftware ExecuteSP5853todownloadthefixedstampdatarequired by the hard disks 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Select SP5853 and then press EXECUTE The following screen opens while the stamp data is downloading The download is finished when the message prompts you to close 3 Press the Exit button Then turn the copier off and on again Downloading Stamp Data 627 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 630: ...nd the following filename NVRAM serial number NV Here is an example with Serial Number K5000017114 NVRAM K5000017114 NV 7 In order to prevent an error during the download be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do ...

Page 631: ...press the Execute key The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully The download fails if the serial numbers do not match This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM Total Count C O P O Count NVRAM Data Upload Download 629 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 632: ...in power switch of the main machine 4 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine x 1 5 Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 for service use 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Enter the SP mode 8 Do SP5 846 051 Backup All Addr Book 9 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 10 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 11 Install the SD slot cover If the cap...

Page 633: ...store All Addr Book 7 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 8 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 9 Install the SD slot cover The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded If there is no data of address book information in the SD card an error message is displaye...

Page 634: ...on from the HDD to an SD card Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine Then ask the user to reproduce the problem Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected 1 En...

Page 635: ...d specify the events that you want to record in the debug log SP5858 Debug Save When provides the following items for selection 1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams...

Page 636: ... Section 4 Troubleshooting 6 Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information Touch 5859 Under 5859 press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record Enter the appropriate 4 digit number Then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered 5 System Maintenance 634 5 CÓPI...

Page 637: ... zero 0 Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language GSP PM GW Print Service Print Module PTS Print Server IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource Management NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box Document Server The machine ...

Page 638: ...Latest 4 MB to write the debugging data to the SD card 3 Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want Recording Errors Manually SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically Please instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the d...

Page 639: ...letely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD With the file already created on the HDD for the log file the data only needs to be recorded A new log file does not need to be created To create a new log file do SP5857 011 to delete the debug log data from the HDD Then do SP585...

Page 640: ...usly stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact Card Save SD has Add and New menu items Card Save Add Appends files to the SD Card Does not overwrite existing files If the card becomes full or if all file names are used an error will be displayed on the operation panel Subsequent jobs will not be stored Card Save New Overwrites files in the card s prt cardsave directory Limitati...

Page 641: ...utton to register the change The result should look like 00010000 By doing this Card Save option will appear in the List Test Print menu 7 Press Exit to exit SP Mode 8 Press the User Tools Counter button 9 Select Printer Features Card Save Function 639 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 642: ...ve New 11 Press OK and then exit the User Tools Counter menu 12 Press the Printer button 13 Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel 14 Send a job to the printer The Communicating light should start blinking 5 System Maintenance 640 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 643: ...to register the changes 18 Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off Error Messages Card Save error messages Init error A card save process e g card detection change to kernel mode failed to initialize Card not found Card cannot be detected in the slot No memory Insufficient working memory to process the job Write error Failed to write to the card Other error An unknown error oc...

Page 644: ...5 System Maintenance 642 5 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 645: ...ine operates as usual excluding the related units Turn the operation switch off and on C The error is logged The SC code history is updated The machine operates as usual The SC will not show Only the SC history is updated D The machine operation is disabled You can reset the machine by turning the operation switch or main switch off and on If the error occurs again the same SC code is displayed Tu...

Page 646: ...ique for a specific model 2XX Laser exposure 200 Polygon motor 220 Synchronization control 230 FGATE signal related 240 LD control 280 Unique for a specific model 290 Shutter 3XX Image development 1 300 Charge 330 Drum potential 350 Development 380 Unique for a specific model 4XX Image development 2 400 Image transfer 420 Paper separation 430 Cleaning 440 Around drum 460 Unit 480 Others 6 Troubles...

Page 647: ... counters 620 Mechanical counters 630 Account control 640 CSS 650 Network 670 Internal data processing 680 Unique for a specific model 7XX Peripherals 700 Original handling 720 Two tray finisher 740 Booklet finisher 8XX Controller 800 Error after ready condition 820 Diagnostics error 860 Hard disk 880 Unique for a specific model 9XX Others 900 Counter 920 Memory 990 Others SC Tables 645 6 CÓPIA NÃ...

Page 648: ...4 Replace the lamp stabilizer 5 Replace the scanner mirror s or scanner lens No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 120 D Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition during operation Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SBU and scanner motor disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Har...

Page 649: ...tween SBU and HP sensor disconnected 1 Check the cable connection between the SBU and scanner motor 2 Check the cable connection between the SBU and HP sensor 3 Replace the scanner motor 4 Replace the HP sensor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 141 D Black level detection error The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp Harness ...

Page 650: ...ing initialization 3 Check the harness connection between SBU and IPU 4 Replace the exposure lamp 5 Replace the scanner motor 6 Replace the SBU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 144 D SBU communication error The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode Defective SBU Defective harness Defective detection port on the IPU 1 Re...

Page 651: ... data security function is set ON with the initial setting A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set ON with the initial setting Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board 1 Reinstall the copy data security board 2 Replace the copy data security board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 195 D...

Page 652: ...tor 1 Replace the polygon motor 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the harness 4 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 203 D Polygon motor error 2 OFF timeout The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the polygon motor switches off Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board Defective p...

Page 653: ...ocedures 220 D Laser synchronizing detection error start position K LD0 222 D Laser synchronizing detection error start position Y LD0 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB K Y is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective connection ...

Page 654: ...ge in normal job or MUSIC for end position K The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 232 D FGATE ON error Y The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position Y See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No ...

Page 655: ...oubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 236 D FGATE ON error C The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position C See SC 230 for troubleshooting details No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 237 D FGATE OFF error C The PFGATE ON signal still asserts ...

Page 656: ...attern sampling error insufficient image density Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment Defective image transfer belt unit Defective PCDU s Defective laser optics housing unit 1 Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDUs 2 Check if each toner bottle has enough toner 3 Replace the ID sensor 4 Replace the image transfer belt unit 5 Replace the PCDU s 6 Replace the lase...

Page 657: ...lopment motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque caused by connected components Defective motor 1 Adjust the torque properly by replacing or cleaning the PCDU 2 Replace the PCDU 3 Replace the development motor CMY if load torque is normal SC3xx Image Processing 2 No T...

Page 658: ... Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 364 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 K 365 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 M 366 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 C 367 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 Y The Vt value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3020 004 default 0 5V for 10 counts TD sensor harness disconnected loose defective A drawer connector disconn...

Page 659: ...fective 1 Remove the heat seal from each PCDU 2 Replace the defective PCDU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 380 C Drum gear position sensor error K 381 C Drum gear position sensor error CMY The machine does not detect the drum position signal for 3 seconds at the drum phase adjustment Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor 1 Clean the drum gear position senso...

Page 660: ...rocedures 400 D ID sensor adjustment error When the Vsg error counter reaches 3 the machine detects SC400 The Vsg error counter counts 1 when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than the value default 4 5V specified with SP3324 005 or less than the value default 3 5V specified with SP3324 006 Dirty or defective ID sensor Defective ID sensor shutter 1 Check the harness of the ID sensor 2 Clean or...

Page 661: ...t contact sensor or motor Disconnected cable 1 Replace the image transfer belt contact sensor 2 Replace the image transfer belt contact motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 443 C Image transfer unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error Defective encoder sensor Image transfer unit installation error Defective image transfer unit motor 1 Check if the ...

Page 662: ...fer unit contact sensor 3 Replace the paper transfer unit contact motor 4 Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU 5 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 460 D Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms This SC is issued if the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D ac Damaged insulation on the hi...

Page 663: ...ce the high voltage supply unit No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 492 C High voltage power Image transfer paper transfer bias output error An error signal is detected for 0 2 seconds when charging the separation image transfer bet or paper transfer roller High voltage leak Broken harness Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit Defective high voltag...

Page 664: ... the temperature sensor was not within the prescribed range 0 2V to 3 5V The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the prescribed range 0 01V to 2 4V Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected loose defective Temperature and humidity sensor defective 1 Check the connector and harness 2 Replace the temperature humidity sensor SC5xx Paper Feed and Fusing No Type Details S...

Page 665: ... lift motor defective 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the tray lift motor 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 530 D Development fan 1 error 531 D Development fan 2 error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective development fan 1 or development fan 2 Disconnected or defect...

Page 666: ...place the harness 2 Replace the laser unit fan 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 533 D Fusing front fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective fusing front fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective BCU 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the fusing front fan 3...

Page 667: ...ck or replace the harness 2 Replace the fusing rear fan 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 535 D Drive unit fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective drive unit fan Disconnected or defective harness Defective BCU 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the drive unit fa...

Page 668: ...not receive the lock signal 2 seconds after turning on the fusing paper exit motor Motor overload Defective fusing paper exit motor 1 Check or replace the harness 2 Replace the fusing paper exit motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 541 A Heating roller thermopile error The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile does not reach 0 C for 6 seconds Loos...

Page 669: ... thermopile 1 Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected 2 Replace the thermopile No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 543 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 software error The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile stays at 230 C for 1 second Defective PSU Defective IPU Defective BCU Related SC code SC 553 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replac...

Page 670: ... Related SC code SC 543 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the IPU 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 545 A Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 1 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the heating roller fusing lamp keeps on full power for 8 seconds Broken heating roller fusing lamp Related SC code SC 555 1 Replace the hea...

Page 671: ...d zero cross signal is less than 45 Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply 1 Check the power supply source 2 Replace the PSU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 551 A Heating roller thermistor error The temperature at the end of the heating roller measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 0 C for 7 seconds ...

Page 672: ...ures 553 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 software error The temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor stays at 230 C or more for 1 second Defective PSU Defective IPU Defective BCU 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the IPU 3 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 554 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 hardware error The temperature detec...

Page 673: ...10 times or more in 11 detections the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs Noise High frequency Defective PSU 1 Check the power supply source 2 Replace the PSU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 559 A Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly This SC ...

Page 674: ...istor 1 Check if the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected 2 Replace the thermopile 3 Replace the pressure roller thermistor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 563 A Pressure roller overheat software error The temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor stays at 230 C or more for 1 second Defective PSU Defective IPU Defective BCU 1 Replace the PSU...

Page 675: ...le Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 565 A Pressure roller fusing lamp consecutive full power When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the pressure roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 300 seconds or more Broken pressure roller fusing lamp Defective pressure roller thermistor 1 Replace the pressure roller lamp 2 Replace the pressure roller thermistor 3 Replace the PSU SC6xx ...

Page 676: ...ooting Procedures 620 D ARDF communication error AftertheARDFisdetected thebreaksignaloccursorcommunicationtimeoutoccurs Incorrect installation of ARDF ARDF defective BCU board defective External noise 1 Check the cable connection of the ARDF 2 Shut out the external noise 3 Replace the ARDF 4 Replace the BCU board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 621 D Finisher com...

Page 677: ...mes Cable problems IPU problems BCU problems PSU problems in the machine Main board problems in the peripherals 1 Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected 2 Replace the PSU if no power is supplied to peripherals 3 Replace the IPU or main board of peripherals 4 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 623 D 2nd Paper Bank communication erro...

Page 678: ...CTL B Counter device error 2 After communication is established the controller receives the brake signal from the accounting device Serial line between the optional counter device the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter device 1 Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set 2 Check the connection between ...

Page 679: ...cation module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken There is no DESS module in the machine No expanded authentication module Defective SD card No DESS module 1 Install the expanded authentication module 2 Install the SD card 3 Install the DESS module 02 D Version error The version of the expanded auth...

Page 680: ...01 Authentication error The authentication for the Embedded RCG M fails at a dial up connection Incorrect SP settings Disconnected telephone line Disconnected modem board Check and set the correct user name SP5816 156 and password SP5816 157 004 Incorrect modem setting Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting Same as 001 Check and set the correct AT command SP5819 160 005 Communication lin...

Page 681: ...e controller board The controller board in this machine has already been used in a machine in which RC Gate was installed The controller board NVRAM in this machine has already been used in a machine in which RC Gate was installed If an error occurs at installation of the RC Gate 1 Check that the individual certificate is correct for the NVRAM in the machine and that the ID2 is correct 2 Reinstall...

Page 682: ...ate after writing the common certificate No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 669 D EEPROM error Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the EEPROM error Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 670 CTL D Engine start up error The ready signal from the ...

Page 683: ...ils Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 682 D Memory chip at TD sensor Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory chip communication error Damaged memory chip data Disconnected inter face No memory chip on the development unit Noise 1 Replace the PCDU 2 Replace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troub...

Page 684: ...ace the BCU No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 690 D GAVD communication error The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization A device status error occurs during I2C bus communication The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage Loose connection Defective BCU Defective LD controller board 1 Turn the main swit...

Page 685: ...or and or jogger motor 4 Replace the finisher main board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 725 B Finisher exit guide plate motor error with the side tray installed After moving away from the guide plate position sensor the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issue...

Page 686: ...hanism 3 Replace the shift tray HP sensor and or shift motor 4 Replace the finisher main board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 740 B Finisher corner stapler motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code For internal finisher The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating The HP se...

Page 687: ...56 B Finisher pick up solenoid error with the side tray installed Solenoid harness loose broken Solenoid obstructed Solenoid defective 1 Check or replace the solenoid harness 2 Replace the pick up solenoid No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 793 B Finisher gathering roller motor error Motor overload Loose connection of the gathering roller motor Defective gathering ro...

Page 688: ...ng Procedures 795 B Finisher shift roller motor error Motor overload Loose connection of the shift roller motor Defective shift roller motor 1 Check the connections to the shift roller motor 2 Replace the shift roller motor No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 796 B Finisher tray lift motor error Motor overload Loose connection of the tray lift motor Defective tray lif...

Page 689: ...layed on the operation panel 0x5032 HAIC P2 error System program defective Controller board defective Optional board defective Replace controller firmware 0x5245 vm_pageout VM is full 0x5355 L2 status time out 554C USB error No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 820 CTL D Self diagnostics error CPU XXXX Detailed error code 0612 Cut in in ASIC occurs Defective ASIC Defec...

Page 690: ...0B1 Could not initialize or read the bus connection Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the mother board 50B2 Value of the SSCG register is incorrect Check for loose connections at the mother board Replace the mother board No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 851 CTL B IEEE1394 interface error The 1394 interface is unusable Defective IEEE1394 Defect...

Page 691: ... wireless LAN board is detected Loose connection Check the connection No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 855 856 CTL B Wireless LAN Bluetooth card error An error is detected in the wireless LAN Bluetooth card Loose connection Defective wireless LAN Bluetooth card 1 Check the connection 2 Replace the wireless LAN Bluetooth card No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause T...

Page 692: ...r HDD error The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD Defective SATA chip on the controller board 1 Replace the controller board 2 NVRAM data encryption error 1 An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted Defective NVRAM on the controller board 1 Replace the NVRAM 30 NVRAM data encryption error 2 An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted Defective controller board...

Page 693: ...HDD 1 Install the HDD correctly 2 Initialize the HDD 9 Power failure during the data encryption The data encryption NVRAM and HDD has not been completed Power failure during the data encryption 1 Initialize the HDD 10 Data read write error The DMAC error is detected twice or more Same as SC863 No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 860 CTL B HDD Initialization error The ...

Page 694: ...s 3 Replace the HDD 4 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 863 CTL D HDD Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly Defective HDD Defective controller 1 Replace the HDD 2 Replace the controller No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 864 CTL D HDD CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing d...

Page 695: ...or A correct license is not found in the SD card SD card data is corrupted Defective SD card 1 Store correct data in the SD card 2 Replace the SD card 3 Replace the NVRAM No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 867 CTL D SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot Defective SD card 1 Install the SD card 2 Turn the main switch off and on 3 Replace the SD card 4 Repl...

Page 696: ... error turn the mains switch off and on 3 Replace the SD card 4 Replace the controller 5 Replace the NVRAM No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 870 CTL B Address book error An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a network Defective software program Defective HDD Incorrect path to the server 1 Initialize the address book data SP5 846 050 2 Init...

Page 697: ... HDD mail transfer error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD 1 Initialize the HDD partition SP5 832 008 2 Replace the HDD No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 874 CTL D Delete All error 1 HDD An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the Security Encryptio...

Page 698: ...chine operation This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating 001 Log Data Error 1 Damaged log data file in the HDD Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 002 Log Data Error 2 An encryption module not installed 1 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 0 is off 2 Install the DESS module 003 Log Data Error 3 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data 1 Ini...

Page 699: ...or The all delete function cannot be executed but the Security Encryption Unit is installed and activated Defective SD card SD card not installed 1 Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card 2 Check and reinstall the SD card No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 878 CTL D TPM system authentication error The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM security ch...

Page 700: ...oting Procedures 881 CTL D Management area error This is a software error than can occur At login When a print job was received When WEB browser was opened Cycle the machine off on No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 899 CTL D Software error A software error occurred in the GW controller Cycle the machine off on Update controller firmware Controller board defective 6 ...

Page 701: ... External Controller Error 3 913 External Controller Error 4 914 External Controller Error 5 The external controller alerted the machine about an error Please refer to the instructions for the external controller application No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 920 CTL D Printer application error An error is detected in the printer application program Defective softwar...

Page 702: ... be debugged or partitioned so the Scan Router functions delivery of received faxes document capture etc Web services and other network functions cannot be used HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code Refer to the four procedures below Recovery from SC 925 No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 990 CTL D Software performance error The software makes an unexpecte...

Page 703: ... occurred No Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 994 CTL C Operation panel management records exceeded An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware This can occur if there if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel No action required because this SC does not interfere...

Page 704: ...function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends abnormally Software including the software configuration defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated 1 Check the devices necessary for the application program If necessary devices have not been installed instal...

Page 705: ...printer driver setting image file the problem may be caused by a software error In this case the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data Symptom Possible Causes Action taken Summary sheet SP mode Printe...

Page 706: ...replacement 6 Vt error Vt is more than 0 7V when Vcnt is 4 3V 1 Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed 2 Defective TD sensor 7 Vcnt error 1 Vcnt is less than 4 7V when Vcnt is Vt target 0 2V 1 Defective TD sensor 2 Vt target settings are not correct 3 Toner density error 8 Vcnt error 2 Vt is more than 0 7V when Vcnt is 4 3V and Vcnt is less than 4 7V when Vcnt is Vt ta...

Page 707: ...e Vsg Adjustment Result following this table 41 Vt error Vt maximum or minimum error is detected Defective development unit Vt maximum error and an image is faint 1 Replace the toner supply pump unit Vt maximum error and an image is O K 1 Replace the development unit 2 Replace the BCU board Vt minimum error 1 Replace the development unit 2 Replace the BCU board 53 ID sensor coefficient K5 detectio...

Page 708: ...5 ID sensor pattern density is too low Hardware defective 1 Same as 53 2 Replace the toner supply pump unit 57 Vk error Maximum Vk is out of range 150 Vk ID sensor pattern density is too low Hardware defective Same as 53 58 Vk error Minimum Vk is out of range Vk 150 ID sensor pattern density is too high Background dirty Hardware defective Same as 53 59 Sampling data error during gamma correction N...

Page 709: ...sfer belt 4 Replace the ID sensor 5 Check the connection 6 Replace the BCU board 3 ID sensor output error ID sensor output is more than Voffset Threshold SP3 32 4 004 Defective ID sensor Poor connection Defective BCU 1 Replace the ID sensor 2 Check the connection 3 Replace the BCU board 9 Vsg Adjustment error Vsg adjustment has not been completed Other cases Retry SP3 321 010 Line Position Adjustm...

Page 710: ...arget The patterns which ID sensors have detected are not enough for line position adjustment See Note 4 More lines on the pattern than the target Not used in this machine 5 Out of the adjustment range ID sensors have correctly detected the patterns for line position adjustment but a shift of patterns is out of adjustable range See Note 6 9 Not used For details see the Troubleshooting Guide Line P...

Page 711: ...Completed successfully 1 Not completed If the result is 1 refer to Countermeasure list for color registration errors 5 Put some A4 LT paper on the by pass tray When you print a test pattern use the by pass tray to feed the paper 6 Print out test pattern 7 with SP2 109 003 7 Check the printed output with a loupe 8 If there are no color registration errors on the output the line position adjustment ...

Page 712: ... 3 Replace the BCU After Executing SP2 111 003 Result 1 in SP2 194 007 One of results 5 Out of adjustable range in SP2 194 010 011 012 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure The main scan registrations of M C Y are shifted by more than 15 mm from the main scan registration of K Defective laser unit Defective BCU 1 Replace the laser unit 2 Replace the BCU The sub scan registrations of M C...

Page 713: ...ctive laser optics housing unit Defective BCU 1 Reinstall or replace the PCDU 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the BCU Others Skew correction upper limit error Defective BCU Defective laser optics housing unit 1 Replace the BCU 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit After Executing SP2 111 003 Result 1 in SP2 194 007 Result 0 in SP2 194 010 011 012 Test pattern check Possible cau...

Page 714: ...eplace the ID sensor shutter solenoid 2 Replace the ID sensor 3 Replace the BCU After Executing SP2 111 001 Result 1 in SP2 194 007 Result 5 Out of adjustable range in SP2 194 010 011 012 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure Low image density on the output Low pattern density Do the forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx The main scan registrations of M C Y...

Page 715: ...area on the image transfer belt Defective BCU 1 Replace the ID sensor 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace the BCU The skew for M C Y is more than 0 75 mm from the main scan registrationofK attheendofthescan line Defective PCDU Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BCU 1 Reinstall or replace the PCDU 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the BCU Others Skew correction up...

Page 716: ...ut Low pattern density Do the forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx Themainscanregistrationisshifted but only at the central area of the image on the output Defective ID sensor at center Deformed center area on the image transfer belt Defective BCU 1 Replace the ID sensor 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace the BCU The main scan registrations of M C Y are shif...

Page 717: ...place the PCDU 2 Replace the laser optics housing unit 3 Replace the IPU The sub scan lines are shifted Shifted lines appear cyclically Defective PCDU Defective drive unit Drum phase adjustment error 1 Do SP1 902 001 Drum phase adjustment see Replacement and Adjustment Drive Unit Gear Unit for details 2 Reinstall or replace the PCDU 3 Check or replace the drive unit Problem at Regular Intervals Im...

Page 718: ... spots at 82 mm intervals Image transfer belt drive roller Image transfer belt idling roller Colored spots at 33 mm intervals Development roller Abnormal image at 83 mm intervals Paper transfer roller Colored spots at 94 mm intervals OPC drum Spots at 141 mm intervals Pressure roller Spots at 126 mm intervals Fusing roller Spots at 204 mm intervals Fusing belt 6 Troubleshooting 716 6 CÓPIA NÃO CON...

Page 719: ...guide and the paper transfer roller Defective HVPS Replace HVPS Defective BCU Replace the BCU All black Print Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions All the paper is black Incorrectly installed PCDU Install the PCDU correctly Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU Defective HVPS Replace HVPS Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit Defective BCU Replace the BCU Defective main board Replace the main ...

Page 720: ...Printed images are too weak Loose connection between paper transfer roller and HVPS Check the connection between the paper transfer roller and the HVPS Dust in the laser beam path Clean the laser beam path Image transfer belt not contacting PCDU Check the image transfer belt unit Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU Defective paper transfer roller Repair the paper transfer roller Defective fusing unit ...

Page 721: ... image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt or image transfer belt unit At intervals of 41 mm 1 61 inches Defective image transfer roller Replace the image transfer roller At intervals of 82 mm 3 23 inches Defective image transfer belt drive roller or image transfer belt idling roller Replace the image transfer belt drive roller or image transfer belt idling roller Dark Vertical Line on P...

Page 722: ...ecessary actions Some parts of images are missing Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU Defective image transfer belt unit Replace the image transfer belt unit Defective paper transfer roller Replace the paper transfer roller Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit Dirty Background Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Backgrounds of one CMYK color are too dense Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU ...

Page 723: ...tervals Defective image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt unit CMY Color Irregular Streaks Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Unexpected streaks of the same color appear at irregular intervals Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU Defective image transfer belt unit Replace the image transfer belt unit Ghosting Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions The same or similar image appears t...

Page 724: ...ion of paper Install the paper correctly Incorrect paper guide position Adjust the paper guide correctly When adjusting the paper width use the right side guide only with the green clip Do not hold the left side guide at this time or skew will occur Defective registration roller Repair the paper feed unit Incorrect action of paper transfer roller Check the paper transfer roller Defective BCU Repla...

Page 725: ...efective toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge Defective image transfer belt unit Replace the image transfer belt unit Image transfer belt not contacting PCDU Check the image transfer belt unit Image not centered when it should be Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Imagesdonotcometothecenter Incorrect installation of paper Install the paper correctly Incorrect paper guide position Adju...

Page 726: ... 3 Tray 1 ON Paper is not fed from tray 1 A 7504 4 Tray 2 ON Paper is not fed from tray 2 Y 7504 5 Tray 3 ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 Y 7504 6 Tray 4 ON Paper is not fed from tray 4 Y 7504 8 Bypass ON Paper is not fed from the by pass tray A 7504 9 Duplex ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit Z 7504 11 Vertical Transport 1 ON Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from tray 1 A 7504...

Page 727: ...ot detect paper Z 7504 27 Duplex Entrance ON Out Duplex entrance sensor does not detect paper again after paper has passed this sensor Z 7504 28 Inverter ON In Inverter sensor does not detect paper Z 7504 29 Inverter ON Out Inverter sensor does not detect paper again after paper has passed this sensor Z 7504 47 Paper Feed Sensor 1 Paper Feed Sensor 1 does not turn off A 7504 48 Bank Paper Feed Sen...

Page 728: ...verter sensor does not turn off after paper has passed this sensor Z 7504 230 Finisher Entrance Finisher entrance sensor does not detect paper R1 7504 240 Finisher Entrance Finisher entrance sensor does not detect paper R1 7504 241 Finisher Entrance Finisher entrance sensor does not turn off R1 7504 242 Finisher Exit Finisher exit sensor does not detect paper Finisher exit sensor does not turn off...

Page 729: ...tion Tray lower limit sensor does not turn on after the jogger fence has returned to its home position R2 7504 248 Finisher Stapler Motor Stapler HP sensor does not turn off after the jogger fence has moved from its home position Stapler HP sensor does not turn on after the jogger fence has returned to its home position R2 7504 249 Finisher Pick up Solenoid Pick up solenoid error R1 7504 250 Data ...

Page 730: ...ze Size Code Paper Size 06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF 14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF 38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF 44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF 133 A4 SEF 172 HLT SEF 134 A5 SEF 255 Others 6 Troubleshooting 728 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 731: ...cannot be detected Shorted Toner end is detected 4 Transfer Belt Contact Sensor L CN128 21 Open SC442 Shorted 5 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Sensor L CN128 8 Open SC452 Shorted 6 TD Sensor K TD Sensor M TD Sensor C TD Sensor Y A CN108 19 CN109 17 CN108 8 CN109 25 Open SC372 K SC373 M SC374 C SC375 Y Shorted 7 ITB Rotation Sensor A CN128 18 Open Automatic line position adjustment error Transfer be...

Page 732: ... the Left Cover is closed and the Waste Toner Bottle is set correctly is displayed Shorted Left cover open cannot be detected Waste toner bottle set cannot be detected 11 Temperature Humidity Sensor A CN127 1 3 Open Printed image is wrong such as rough image dirty background or weak image SC498 Shorted 12 Paper Size Switch L CN116 Open Paper Tray is detected Paper Tray is not detected Shorted 13 R...

Page 733: ...CN110 2 5 8 11 Open SC400 Shorted 17 Thermistor A CN125 5 7 Open SC554 SC544 Shorted 18 Pressure Roller Thermistor A CN125 9 Open SC564 Shorted 19 ARDF Cover Sensor L CN111 Open Cover Open is displayed Shorted 20 Duplex Cover Sensor L CN126 A5 Open Cover Open is displayed Shorted Duplex cover open cannot be detected 21 Registration Sensor L CN1 2 Open Paper is not detected Jam A Shorted Paper is d...

Page 734: ...aper is detected Jam A 24 Paper Lift Sensor H CN129 13 Open SC501 Shorted 25 Paper End Sensor L CN129 10 Open Paper end is not detected Jam A Shorted Paper end is detected 26 Fusing Entrance Sensor L CN126 A14 Open Paper jam is not detected Shorted Paper jam is detected Jam B 27 Duplex Entrance Sensor L CN126 A2 Open Paper is not detected Jam Z Shorted Paper is detected Jam Z 6 Troubleshooting 732...

Page 735: ...r end is not detected Jam A Shorted Paper end is detected 30 By pass Paper Size Sensor L CN126 Open Paper is detected Shorted Paper is not detected 31 Inverter Sensor L CN126 A8 Open Paper is not detected Jam Z Shorted Paper is detected Jam Z 32 Fusing Exit Sensor H CN104 12 Open Jam C 33 Scanner HP Sensor L CN111 14 Open SC120 121 Shorted Electrical Component Defects 733 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓ...

Page 736: ...ed FU2 8A 125V 8A 125V 24VS1 power to the BCU not supplied 5VS power to the IPU not supplied FU3 5A 250V 5A 250V 5V power to the BCU and IPU not supplied 5VS power to the IPU not supplied FU101 15A 250V 8A 250V Fusing SC occurs FU102 10A 250V 6 3A 250V No response FU103 2A 250V 2A 250V Power to all the anti condensation heaters not supplied 6 Troubleshooting 734 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CO...

Page 737: ...ttings and pressed the start key The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the SBU test pattern is normal The followings can be the cause if the copy is normal and the SBU test pattern is abnormal The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU The IPU or SBU board may be defective Scanner Test Mode 735 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 738: ...6 Troubleshooting 736 6 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 739: ...d then the energy saved will be different For example if the timers are all set to 60 min the grey area will disappear and no energy is saved before 60 min expires Timer Settings The user can set these timers with User Tools System settings Timer setting Panel off timer 10 sec 30 min Panel Off Mode Default setting 1 min Energy saver timer 1 30 min Low Power Mode Default setting 5 min Auto off time...

Page 740: ...hat their energy costs could increase and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use If it is necessary to change the settings please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too long Try with a shorter setting first such as 30 min then go to a longer one such as 60 min if the customer is not satisfied If the timers are all set to the maximum value the mach...

Page 741: ...P8941 001 to 005 At the end of the measurement period read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again Find the amount of time spent in each mode subtract the earlier measurement from the later measurement Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode Convert the result to kWh kilowatt hours Here is an example calculation Machine Condition SP8941 Machine Status Time at Start min Time at End ...

Page 742: ...Sleep 005 Off Mode Time 508776 0 520377 0 193 35 1 8 0 35 Total 17 47 7 Energy Saving 740 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 743: ... This means that less energy overall is used for paper production which improves the environment 1 Duplex Reduce paper volume in half 2 Combine mode Reduce paper volume in half 3 Duplex Combine Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3 4 Paper Save 741 7 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 744: ...per reduction ratio when compared with Single sided copying with no 2 in 1 combine mode Paper reduction ratio Number of sheets reduced A Number of printed original images B x 100 Number of sheets reduced A Output pages in duplex mode 2 Number of pages in Single sided with combine mode Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3 2 A 2 2 3 4 x 3 2 Number of printed original images B Total counte...

Page 745: ...Model Z C1 Machine Codes M022 M024 M026 M028 Appendices 19 Nov 2010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 746: ...CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 747: ...ntenance Tables Maintenance Tables 13 Preventive Maintenance Items 13 Other Yield Parts 15 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables System SP xxx 19 SP1 XXX Feed 19 System SP2 xxx 46 SP2 XXX Drum 46 System SP3 xxx 169 SP3 XXX Process 169 System SP4 xxx 218 SP4 XXX Scanner 218 System SP5 xxx 236 SP5 XXX Mode 236 System SP6 xxx 301 SP6 XXX Peripherals 301 System SP7 xxx 303 SP7 XXX Data Log 303 System SP8 xxx 334 ...

Page 748: ...eck Table 386 Printer Service Mode 393 SP1 XXX Service Mode 393 Scanner Service Mode 402 SP1 xxx System and Others 402 SP2 XXX Scanning image quality 403 Test Pattern Printing 405 INDEX 407 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 749: ... Time Color 15 seconds or less A4 LT SEF Black and White 10 seconds or less A4 LT SEF Warm up Time 50 seconds or less Print Paper Capacity 80 g m2 20lb Standard tray 550 sheets By pass tray 100 sheets Optional paper feed tray 550 sheets Print Paper Size See Supported Paper Sizes Minimum Maximum Standard Tray 98 x 148 mm 216 x 355 6 mm By pass 70 x 127 mm 216 x 1260 mm Optional Tray 98 x 148 mm 216...

Page 750: ...r North America 220 V 240 V 50 60 Hz More than 8 A for Europe Asia Power Consumption 120 V 1600 W or less 220 240 V 1650 W or less Energy Saver 2 5 W or less Noise Emission Sound Power Level C1a Color 68 5 dB A Black and White 68 3 dB A C1b Color 70 0 dB A Black and White 70 0 dB A Dimensions W x D x H 550 x 570 x 710 mm 21 7 x 22 4 x 28 including ARDF and operation panel Weight Basic model 80 kg ...

Page 751: ...Base TX 10 Base T Standard USB2 0 Type A B Standard IEEE802 11a g Wireless LAN Optional Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base T Optional Bluetooth Optional Network Protocols TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 Bonjour Scanner Scanning Speed B W over 30ipm A4 SEF 200dpi Mono 1bit MH compression with ADF Color over 30ipm A4 SEF 200dpi with FC letter photo JPEG standard compression with ADF Standard Scanner Resolution DF 600 x 30...

Page 752: ...he top original Power Source DC 24V 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption 50 W or less Dimensions W x D x H 450 x 400 x 110 mm 17 7 x 15 7 x 4 3 Weight 5 kg 11 lb or less Internal Finisher Paper Size A6 to LG Paper Weight 52 to 256 g m2 14 to 68 lb Tray Capacity 250 sheets A4 LT or smaller Staple capacity 50 sheets A4 LT or smaller Staple position 1 position Staple replenishment Cartridge 500...

Page 753: ...EF 5 5 x 8 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y F GL SEF 8 x 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Foolscap SEF 8 5 x 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Folio SEF 8 25 x 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 16K SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Custom Width mm 98 x 216 70 x 216 102 x 216 inch 3 94 x 8 5 2 76 x 8 5 4 02 x 8 5 Custom Length mm 148 x 355 6 127 x 1260 148 x 355 6 inch 5 83 x 14 5 00 x 49 61 5 83 x 14 Com10 Env 4 13 x 9 5 Y Y Y ...

Page 754: ...A E A NA E A C5 Env 162 x 229 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y N DL Env 110 x 220 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Supported the sensor detects the paper size Y Supported the user specifies the paper size N Not supported 1 Appendix Specifications 8 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 755: ...Windows 2000 Windows XP Vista Macintosh PCL 5c 6 Yes Yes Yes No PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes XPS No No Yes No The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers except for Windows 2000 which uses Microsoft PS A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7 6 or later versions Software Accessories 9 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 756: ...x 121 mm 20 5 x 22 2 x 4 8 Weight 13 kg 28 7 lb or less Paper Feed Unit M368 Paper Feed System FRR Paper Height Detection 5 steps 100 70 30 10 Near end and Empty Capacity 550 sheets x 2 trays Paper Weight 52 to 256 g m2 14 to 68 lb Paper Size A5 HLT to A4 LG SEF Power Source DC 24V 5V from the main frame Power Consumption Less than 45 W Less than 98 W with M367 Dimensions W x D x H 520 mm x 563 mm...

Page 757: ...Manager 2000 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer Smart Device Monitor for Admin A printer management utility for administrator DeskTopBinder Lite Ver 5 Professional Ver 5 DeskTopBinder itself can be used as personal document management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saves in each client s PC Remote Communication ...

Page 758: ...1 Appendix Specifications 12 1 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 759: ...ircumstances and print conditions Symbol keys C Clean R Replace L Lubricant I Inspect Mainframe Item 60K 120K 180K 240K EM Remarks Scanner Reflector C Optics cloth 1st 2nd 3rd mirrors C Optics cloth Front and Rear Rails C Dry cloth Exposure Glass C Dry cloth alcohol ADF Exposure Glass C Dry cloth alcohol PCDU PCU K R Dev Unit K R Transfer Image Transfer Belt cleaning Unit R 13 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 760: ...erter Sensor C Damp cloth Duplex Rollers C Damp cloth Fusing Exit Sensor C Dry cloth Paper Dust Container C Vacuum Duplex Entrance Sensor C Dry cloth Vertical Transport Roller C Damp cloth Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth Vertical Transport Sensor C Dry cloth Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth Paper Feed Roller C Dry cloth Separation Roller C Dry cloth Pick up Roller C Dry cloth Miscellaneous 2 Appendix ...

Page 761: ...etime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions ACV color ratio P J and C O So these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts EM parts Mainframe Item 60K 240K Remarks PCDU PCU C M Y R Development Unit C M Y R ITB and PTR unit Image Transfer Belt Unit R Fusing Fusing Roller Bearing R S552R Pressure Roller Bearing R S552R Heating Roller R ARDF Item 60K EM Remarks Pick ...

Page 762: ... Damp cloth alcohol Internal Finisher Item EM Remarks Sensors C Blower brush Rollers C Damp cloth alcohol One tray Paper Feed Unit M367 Item EM Remarks Feed Roller C Dry cloth Separation Roller C Dry cloth Pick up Roller C Dry cloth Relay Roller C Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth Sensors C Blower brush Two tray Paper Feed Unit M368 Item EM Remarks 2 Appendix Preventive Maintenance Tables 1...

Page 763: ...loth Sensors C Blower brush Side Tray M369 Items EM Remarks Rollers C Damp cloth Exit Tray C Damp cloth Bearing C S552R 1 Bin Tray M370 Items EM Remarks Rollers C Damp cloth Exit Tray C Damp cloth Exit Sensor C Blower brush Paper Sensor C Blower brush Bearing C S552R Maintenance Tables 17 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 764: ...2 Appendix Preventive Maintenance Tables 18 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 765: ...p 003 Tray Thick1 ENG 9 to 9 2 5 0 1 mm step 004 Tray Thick2 ENG 9 to 9 3 7 0 1 mm step 005 Tray Thick3 ENG 9 to 9 3 5 0 1 mm step 006 Tray Plain 1200dpi ENG 9 to 9 0 8 0 1 mm step 007 Tray M Thick 1200dpi ENG 9 to 9 0 5 0 1 mm step 008 Tray Thick1 1200dpi ENG 9 to 9 0 5 0 1 mm step 009 By pass Plain ENG 9 to 9 3 9 0 1 mm step 010 By pass M Thick ENG 9 to 9 0 1 0 1 mm step 011 By pass Thick1 ENG 9...

Page 766: ... by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode and tray Increasing a value an image is moved to the rear edge of paper Decreasing a value an image is moved to the front edge of paper 001 By pass ENG 4 to 4 0 0 0 1 mm step 002 Paper Tray 1 ENG 003 Paper Tray 2 ENG 004 Paper Tray 3 ENG 005 Paper Tray 4 ENG 006 Duplex ENG 1003 Paper Buckle Paper Buckle Adjustment Tray Location Paper Ty...

Page 767: ...i ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 015 Tray1 Thick1 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 016 Tray234 Plain 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 017 Tray234 M Thick 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 018 Tray234 Thick1 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 019 By pass Plain 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 020 By pass M Thick 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 1 1 mm step 021 By pass Thick1 1200dpi ENG 11 to 9 3 1 mm step 022 Duplex Plain 12...

Page 768: ...ling Before Job 001 Environment Thresh ENG 0 to 2 2 1 step 002 Idling Temp P Roll ENG 0 to 160 160 1 deg step Specifies the threshold temperature for the pressure roller idling before a job 003 Idling Time BW ENG Specifies the fusing idling time for each printe mode before a job 0 to 10 2 1 sec step 004 Idling Time FC ENG 005 Idling Time M Thick BW ENG 006 Idling Time M Thick FC ENG 007 009 Specif...

Page 769: ... 1 deg step 003 P Roll Ready Target Temp ENG 50 to 160 120 1 deg step 007 P Roll Ready Temp ENG 0 to 150 20 1 deg step Sets the heating roller offset temperature at the end of the heating roller This value is one of the thresholds to determine if the machine is at the heating roller target temperature during warm up 010 Stand By Center ENG 50 to 180 160 1 deg step 011 Stand By Ends ENG 50 to 180 1...

Page 770: ...ller temperature center or ends in the sleep mode 0 to 180 0 1 deg step 020 Off Mode Ends ENG 021 Off Mode P Roller ENG 0 to 170 0 1 deg step Specifies the pressure roller temperature in the sleep mode 030 to 239 Thetargetfusingtemperatureforeachpapertypeandmodecanbeadjustedbythefollowing SPs 030 Plain FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 155 1 deg step 031 Plain FC Simplex Ends ENG 032 Plain FC Duple...

Page 771: ...implex Center ENG 100 to 180 165 1 deg step 047 Thick 1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 048 Thick 1 FC Duplex Center ENG 049 Thick 1 FC Duplex Ends ENG 050 Thick 1 BW Simplex Center ENG 051 Thick 1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 052 Thick 1 BW Duplex Center ENG 053 Thick 1 BW Duplex Ends ENG 054 Thick 2 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 140 1 deg step 055 Thick 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 056 OHP FC ENG 100 to 180 160 1 deg ...

Page 772: ...FC Simplex Ends ENG 068 SP 2 FC Duplex Center ENG 069 SP 2 FC Duplex Ends ENG 070 SP 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 071 SP 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 072 SP 2 BW Duplex Center ENG 073 SP 2 BW Duplex Ends ENG 074 SP 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 200 150 1 deg step 075 SP 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 076 SP 3 FC Duplex Center ENG 077 SP 3 FC Duplex Ends ENG 078 SP 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 079 SP 3 BW Simplex Ends ENG ...

Page 773: ... ENG 100 to 180 140 1 deg step 088 Thick 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 089 Thick 3 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 160 1 deg step 090 Thick 3 FC Simplex Ends ENG 091 Thick 3 BW Simplex Center ENG 092 Thick 3 BW Simplex Ends ENG 109 M Thick FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 175 1 deg step 110 M Thick FC Duplex Center ENG 111 M Thick BW Simplex Center ENG 112 M Thick BW Duplex Center ENG 113 M Thick FC Simp...

Page 774: ...g step 129 F Plain1 FC Simplex Ends ENG 130 F Plain1 BW Simplex Center ENG 131 F Plain1 BW Simplex Ends ENG 132 F Plain2 FC Simplex Center ENG 100 to 180 130 1 deg step 133 F Plain2 FC Simplex Ends ENG 134 F Plain2 BW Simplex Center ENG 135 F Plain2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 136 F MThick FC Simplex Center ENG 137 F MThick FC Simplex Ends ENG 138 F MThick BW Simplex Center ENG 139 F MThick BW Simplex End...

Page 775: ... FC Simplex Ends ENG 170 F SP 2 BW Simplex Center ENG 171 F SP 2 BW Simplex Ends ENG 201 Plain1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 120 1 deg step 202 Thin Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 203 Thick1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 130 1 deg step 204 Thick2 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 205 Thick3 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 206 OHP Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 80 1 deg st...

Page 776: ...ress ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 220 F Thick1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 221 F SP 1 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 105 1 deg step 222 F SP 2 Simplex Press ENG 50 to 160 115 1 deg step 223 Plain1 Duplex Press ENG 50 to 160 90 1 deg step 224 Thick1 Duplex Press ENG 225 Thick2 Duplex Press ENG 226 SP 1 Duplex Press ENG 227 SP 2 Duplex Press ENG 228 SP 3 Duplex Press ENG 229 MThick Duple...

Page 777: ...e heating roller has two lamps One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller 003 Pressure Roller Center 10 to 250 0 1 deg step The pressure roller has two lamps One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller 1108 Ready Temp Setting Japan use only 007 Ready Temp Time ENG 22 to 60 43 0 1 sec step 1109 Fu...

Page 778: ...valueofthisSPisaddedtotheheating roller temperature 004 High Temp Correction ENG 0 to 15 3 1 deg step Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller When the high temperature condition specified with SP1112 002 is detected the value of this SP is subtracted from the heating roller temperature 005 Offset Temp Low ENG 0 to 15 5 0 1 deg step 006 Offset Temp High ENG 0 to 15 3 0 1 deg ste...

Page 779: ... mode This idling during the stand by mode prevents the roller deformation 002 Idling Time ENG 0 to 60 2 0 1 sec step Specifies the length of each idling operation during stand by mode 003 Idling Speed ENG 0 to 1 0 1 mm sec step 1116 Fusing Temp Change Paper Type MThick Middle Thick 010 Center Temp 1 ENG 10 10 0 1 deg step Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the...

Page 780: ...en the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper 019 Control Time 2 ENG 0 to 250 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 012 and 013 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper 022 Center Temp 1 MThick ENG 10 to 10 0 1 deg step 023 Ends Temp 1 MThick ENG 024 Cent...

Page 781: ...ronment 002 Humidity Thresh 1 ENG 0 to 100 65 1 Specifies the first threshold humidity for executing the curl correction 003 Humidity Thresh 2 ENG 0 to 100 80 1 Specifies the second threshold humidity for executing the curl correction 004 Pattern 1 MM H Roll ENG 30 to 0 3 1 deg 005 Pattern 1 MM P Roll ENG 0 to 60 0 1 deg 006 Pattern 1 HM H Roll ENG 30 to 0 0 1 deg 007 Pattern 1 HM P Roll ENG 0 to ...

Page 782: ...ENG 0 to 100 75 1 008 Thick1 End ENG 009 Thick2 Center ENG 0 to 100 35 1 010 Thick2 End ENG 011 Thick3 Center ENG 0 to 100 40 1 012 Thick3 End ENG 013 OHP Center ENG 014 OHP End ENG 015 SP 1 Center ENG 0 to 100 80 1 016 SP 1 End ENG 017 SP 2 Center ENG 0 to 100 75 1 018 SP 2 End ENG 019 SP 3 Center ENG 0 to 100 40 1 020 SP 3 End ENG 021 Envir Correct Low ENG 100 to 100 10 1 022 Envir Correct High ...

Page 783: ...ow ENG 0 to 10000 3700 100msec 030 Fgate Timer BW Std ENG 0 to 10000 0 100msec 031 Fgate Timer BW Low ENG 0 to 10000 800 100msec FF Correct Time Specifies the additional time to the FF duty correction time for each lien speed Full Full speed Half Half speed 032 Time Set Std ENG 5000 to 5000 0 100msec 033 Time Set Low ENG Fgate Timer Specifies the additional duty to the heating roller fusing lamp f...

Page 784: ...NG 052 F Plain1 Center ENG 0 to 100 20 1 053 F Plain1 End ENG 054 F M Thick Center ENG 0 to 100 30 1 055 F M Thick End ENG 056 F Thick1 Center ENG 057 F Thick1 End ENG 058 F Special1 Center ENG 059 F Special1 End ENG 060 F Special2 Center ENG 061 F Special2 End ENG 062 F Plain2 Center ENG 0 to 100 20 1 063 F Plain2 End ENG 1120 Multi Print Mode 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 38 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA C...

Page 785: ... Control Method Switch ENG 0 or 1 1 1 Selects the power control method for the fusing unit 0 Fixed control 1 Power control The machine is used over the rated voltage of PSU For example 1700w can be used at the machine of 1500w When the fusing ability is too low early morning or the electrical power environment is not stable this switch can be used However there is a risk of over voltage when using...

Page 786: ... s 001 Regist Plain Low ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 1 002 Regist Plain High ENG 003 Regist M Thick Low ENG 004 Regist M Thick High ENG 005 Regist Thick1 Low ENG 4 to 4 0 7 0 1 006 Regist Thick1 Middle ENG 008 BkOpcDevMot ITB Unit Drum K Development K Motor 260 ENG 4 to 4 0 15 0 1 009 BkOpcDevMot ITB Unit Drum K Development K Motor 182 ENG 011 BkOpcDevMot ITB Unit Drum K Development K Motor 85 ENG 013 ColorOp...

Page 787: ... Feed M Thick High ENG 035 Feed Thick1 Low ENG 2 to 2 0 7 0 1 036 Feed Thick1 Middle ENG 037 Feed Thick2 Low ENG 038 Feed Thick3 Low ENG 039 VerticalTransport Plain Low ENG 2 to 2 0 4 0 1 040 VerticalTransport Plain High ENG 041 VerticalTransport M Thick Low ENG 042 VerticalTransport M Thick High ENG 043 VerticalTransport Thick1 Low ENG 2 to 2 0 7 0 1 044 VerticalTransport Thick1 Middle ENG 045 Ve...

Page 788: ... CCW M Thick Low ENG 058 Duplex CCW M Thick High ENG 059 Duplex CCW Thick1 Low ENG 4 to 4 0 7 0 1 060 Duplex CCW Thick1 Middle ENG 061 Duplex CCW Thick2 Low ENG 062 Reverse CW Plain Low ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 1 063 Reverse CW Plain High ENG 4 to 4 0 7 0 1 064 Reverse CW M Thick Low ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 1 065 Reverse CW M Thick High ENG 4 to 4 0 7 0 1 066 Reverse CW Thick1 Low ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 1 067 Reverse ...

Page 789: ...set 85 Color ENG 80 to 80 0 1 step 130 OpcMot Drum Motor Adjust Control ENG 0 to 1 1 1 step 1902 Gain Control 001 Execute ENG Execute drum phase adjustment 002 Result ENG 0 to 3 0 1 Displays the result of drum phase adjustment 0 Successfully done 2 Sampling failure 3 Insufficient detection number 003 Auto Execute ENG 0 or 1 1 Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or off 0 Off 1 On 1907 Feed...

Page 790: ...x CW STM OFF Low ENG 012 Duplex CW STM OFF Middle ENG 013 Duplex CW STM OFF High ENG 014 By pass Solenoid ON Low ENG 10 to 40 0 1 mm step 015 By pass Solenoid ON Middle ENG 016 By pass Solenoid ON High ENG 017 J GtSOL1 Junction Gate Solenoid ON Low ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 018 Junction Gate SOL1 ON Middle ENG 019 Junction Gate SOL1 ON High ENG 020 Junction Gate SOL1 OFF Low ENG 021 Junction Gate S...

Page 791: ...y2 3 4 Feed STM ON Plain ENG 033 Tray2 3 4 Feed Solenoid ON Thick ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 034 Tray2 3 4 Feed Solenoid OFF Thick ENG 035 Tray2 3 4 Feed Clutch OFF Thick ENG 036 Tray2 3 4 Feed STM ON Thick ENG 1950 Fan Cooling Timeset Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end 001 Development Fan1 ENG 0 to 600 0 1 sec step 002 Development Fan2 ENG 003 Imaging Fan Laser Unit Fan ENG...

Page 792: ...1 1 the values in these SP modes are used for printing 001 Plain Bk ENG 0 to 1000 600 10 V step 002 Plain C ENG 003 Plain M ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 2006 Charge AC V Fixed DFU Paper Type Process Speed Color Paper Type Plain Thick 1 Thick 2 Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes Charge bias AC component is adjusted by environment correction SP2 007 xxx to SP2 011 x...

Page 793: ...rent target of the charge roller for ML environment Meddle temperature and Low humidity 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 0 to 3000 1000 10 A step 002 Environmental Target C ENG 003 Environmental Target M ENG 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 2009 Charge AC Current MM DFU Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MM environment Middle ...

Page 794: ...arge Roller AC Current Adjustment for HH Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for HH environment High temperature and High humidity 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 0 to 3000 1000 10 A step 002 Environmental Target C ENG 003 Environmental Target M ENG 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 2012 Charge Output Control DFU 001 AC Voltage ENG Selects the AC voltage control type 0 or 1...

Page 795: ...0 01 g m3 step 004 Absolute Humidity Thresh 2 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between ML and MM DFU 0 to 100 11 3 0 01 g m3 step 005 Absolute Humidity Thresh 3 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between MM and MH DFU 0 to 100 18 0 0 01 g m3 step 006 Absolute Humidity Thresh 4 ENG Changes the humidity threshold between MH and HH DFU 0 to 100 24 0 0 01 g m3 step 007 Current Temp Display ENG Displ...

Page 796: ...ge step 002 Practice Interval Printing ENG 0 to 2000 0 1 page step 003 Judge Interval ENG 0 to 500 10 1 page step 004 Temp Condition ENG 0 to 99 35 1 deg step 005 Relative Humidity Condition ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 006 Absolute Humidity Condition ENG 0 to 99 12 1 g m3 step 007 Temp Change Thresh M ENG 0 to 99 10 1 deg step 008 RH Change Thresh M ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 009 AH Change Thresh M ENG...

Page 797: ...n The value should be provided with the new laser unit 001 Bk Main Scan Dot ENG 511 to 511 0 1 dot step 002 C Main Scan Dot ENG 003 M Main Scan Dot ENG 004 Y Main Scan Dot ENG 005 Bk Sub Scan Line ENG 800 to 800 0 1 line step 006 C Sub Scan Line ENG 007 M Sub Scan Line ENG 008 Y Sub Scan Line ENG 2102 Magnification Adjust DFU These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustme...

Page 798: ...in Beam Pitch Bk Subdot ENG 15 to 15 3 1 sub dot step 015 Main Beam Pitch C Dot ENG 20 to 20 9 1 dot step 016 Main Beam Pitch C Subdot ENG 15 to 15 3 1 sub dot step 017 Main Beam Pitch M Dot ENG 20 to 20 9 1 dot step 018 Main Beam Pitch M Subdot ENG 15 to 15 4 1 sub dot step 019 Main Beam Pitch Y Dot ENG 20 to 20 9 1 dot step 020 Main Beam Pitch Y Subdot ENG 15 to 15 4 1 sub dot step 2103 Erase Ma...

Page 799: ...ENG 60 to 140 100 0 1 step 002 LD2 K ENG 003 LD1 C ENG 004 LD2 C ENG 005 LD1 M ENG 006 LD2 M ENG 007 LD1 Y ENG 008 LD2 Y ENG 2105 LD Power Adjust DFU Process Speed Color Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed Each LD power setting is decided by process control Low 85 mm s High 260 mm s Middle 182 mm s System SP2 xxx 53 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 800: ...007 M Middle Speed ENG 008 Y Middle Speed ENG 009 Bk Low Speed ENG 010 C Low Speed ENG 011 M Low Speed ENG 012 Y Low Speed ENG 2106 Polygon Rotation Time DFU Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation 001 Warming Up ENG 0 to 60 10 1 sec step 002 Job End ENG 2107 Image Parameter DFU 001 Image Gamma Flag ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 002 Shading Correction Flag ENG 2109 Test Pattern Generates the test pat...

Page 801: ...ayscale Horizontal Margin 22 Two Beam Density Pattern 23 Full Dot Pattern 005 Color Selection Specifies the color for the test pattern 1 to 4 1 1 step 1 All color 2 C 3 M 4 Y 006 Density Bk Specifies the color density for the test pattern 0 to 15 15 1 step 0 Lightest density 15 Darkest density 007 Density C 008 Density M 009 Density Y 2111 Line Pos Ajust 001 Execute Mode a Executes the fine line p...

Page 802: ...of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to SP2145 2117 Skew Adjustment Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M C or Y 001 Pulse C ENG 100 to 100 0 1 pulse step 002 Pulse M ENG 003 Pulse Y ENG 2118 Skew Adjustment 001 Execute C ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117 002 Execute M ENG 003 Execute Y ENG 2119 Skew Adjustment Display Displays the cu...

Page 803: ... the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Average Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step 002 Average C ENG 003 Average M ENG 004 Average Y ENG 005 Average Front ENG 006 Average Center ENG 007 Average Rear ENG 2142 ID Sensor Check Result Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Front C...

Page 804: ... the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01V step 002 Minimum C ENG 003 Minimum M ENG 004 Minimum Y ENG 005 Minimum Front ENG 006 Minimum Center ENG 007 Minimum Rear ENG 2144 ID Sensor Check Result Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process...

Page 805: ...mum 2 Front ENG 006 Minimum 2 Center ENG 007 Minimum 2 Rear ENG 2150 Area Mag Correction LD Pulse Area Correction Color Area FA Adjusts the magnification for each area The main scan 297 mm is divided into 13 areas Area 1 is at the front side of the machine left side of the image and area 13 is at the rear side of the machine right side of the image Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the l...

Page 806: ...a 0 Bk LD2 ENG 041 Area 1 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 233 1sub dot step 042 Area 2 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 193 1sub dot step 043 Area 3 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 58 1sub dot step 044 Area 4 Bk LD2 ENG 045 Area 5 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 143 1sub dot step 046 Area 6 Bk LD2 ENG 047 Area 7 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 47 1sub dot step 048 Area 8 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 23 1sub dot step 049 Area 9 Bk LD2 ENG 255 to 255 0 1su...

Page 807: ...92 Area 0 C LD2 ENG 093 Area 1 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 234 1sub dot step 094 Area 2 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 195 1sub dot step 095 Area 3 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 56 1sub dot step 096 Area 4 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 57 1sub dot step 097 Area 5 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 143 1sub dot step 098 Area 6 C LD2 ENG 099 Area 7 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 50 1sub dot step 100 Area 8 C LD2 ENG 255 to 255 20 1sub dot step 101 Area 9 C ...

Page 808: ...ea 0 M LD2 ENG 145 Area 1 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 232 1sub dot step 146 Area 2 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 192 1sub dot step 147 Area 3 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 60 1sub dot step 148 Area 4 M LD2 ENG 149 Area 5 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 142 1sub dot step 150 Area 6 M LD2 ENG 151 Area 7 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 45 1sub dot step 152 Area 8 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 26 1sub dot step 153 Area 9 M LD2 ENG 255 to 255 0 1sub dot ste...

Page 809: ...11 Y LD1 ENG 195 Area 12 Y LD1 ENG 196 Area 0 Y LD2 ENG 197 Area 1 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 233 1sub dot step 198 Area 2 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 194 1sub dot step 199 Area 3 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 60 1sub dot step 200 Area 4 Y LD2 ENG 201 Area 5 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 144 1sub dot step 202 Area 6 Y LD2 ENG 203 Area 7 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 46 1sub dot step 204 Area 8 Y LD2 ENG 255 to 255 25 1sub dot step 205 A...

Page 810: ... 1 step 004 Area 3 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 97 9 0 1 step 005 Area 4 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 98 0 1 step 006 Area 5 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 99 0 1 step 007 Area 6 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 99 9 0 1 step 008 Area 7 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 100 5 0 1 step 009 Area 8 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 100 4 0 1 step 010 Area 9 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 100 9 0 1 step 011 Area 10 Bk LD1 ENG 50 to 150 101 9 0 1 step 012 Area 11 Bk LD1 ENG ...

Page 811: ...2 ENG 50 to 150 105 5 0 1 step 032 Area 15 Bk LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 4 0 1 step 033 Area 0 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 100 0 1 step 034 Area 1 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 96 4 0 1 step 035 Area 2 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 96 8 0 1 step 036 Area 3 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 97 8 0 1 step 037 Area 4 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 97 5 0 1 step 038 Area 5 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 98 3 0 1 step 039 Area 6 C LD1 ENG 50 to 150 99 1 0 1 step 040 Area...

Page 812: ...0 100 3 0 1 step 058 Area 9 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 101 2 0 1 step 059 Area 10 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 102 1 0 1 step 060 Area 11 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 103 1 0 1 step 061 Area 12 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 103 8 0 1 step 062 Area 13 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 104 6 0 1 step 063 Area 14 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 105 6 0 1 step 064 Area 15 C LD2 ENG 50 to 150 96 4 0 1 step 065 Area 0 M LD1 ENG 50 to 150 100 0 1 step 066 Area 1 M...

Page 813: ...0 to 150 97 9 0 1 step 084 Area 3 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 6 0 1 step 085 Area 4 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 99 1 0 1 step 086 Area 5 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 0 1 step 087 Area 6 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 6 0 1 step 088 Area 7 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 3 0 1 step 089 Area 8 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 2 0 1 step 090 Area 9 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 3 0 1 step 091 Area 10 M LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 0 1 step 092 Area 11 ...

Page 814: ...o 150 98 9 0 1 step 110 Area 13 Y LD1 ENG 50 to 150 98 7 0 1 step 111 Area 14 Y LD1 ENG 50 to 150 97 7 0 1 step 112 Area 15 Y LD1 ENG 50 to 150 98 9 0 1 step 113 Area 0 Y LD2 ENG 50 to 150 100 0 1 step 114 Area 1 Y LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 9 0 1 step 115 Area 2 Y LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 4 0 1 step 116 Area 3 Y LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 1 0 1 step 117 Area 4 Y LD2 ENG 50 to 150 98 4 0 1 step 118 Area 5 Y LD2 E...

Page 815: ...1 SP Clear Execute ENG Clears Shading Correct Setting SP2152 2160 Vertical Line Width DFU 001 600dpi Bk ENG 10 to 15 15 1 step 002 600dpi M ENG 003 600dpi C ENG 004 600dpi Y ENG 005 1200dpi Bk ENG 006 1200dpi M ENG 007 1200dpi C ENG 008 1200dpi Y ENG 2180 Line Pos Adj Clear 001 Color Regist 002 Main Scan Length Detection 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Mag Correction 2181 Line Pos Adj Result DFU System ...

Page 816: ...5000 0 0 001 um step 005 M Scan Shift Left C ENG 16000 to 16000 0 0 001 um step 006 M Scan Shift Center C ENG 007 M Scan Shift RIght C ENG 008 S Scan Shift Left C ENG 21000 to 21000 0 0 001 um step 009 S Scan Shift Center C ENG 010 S Scan Shift RIght C ENG 011 M Cor Dot C ENG 511 to 511 0 1 dot step 012 M Cor Subdot C ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 014 Mag Cor Subdot C ENG 2040 to 2040 0 1 pulse step...

Page 817: ... Line M ENG 800 to 800 0 1 line step 036 S Cor 600 Subdot M ENG 2 to 2 0 0 001 line step 037 S Cor 1200 Line M ENG 1600 to 1600 0 1 line step 038 S Cor 1200 Subdot M ENG 2 to 2 0 0 001 line step 039 Skew Y ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 041 M Scan Shift Left Y ENG 16000 to 16000 0 0 001 um step 042 M Scan Shift Center Y ENG 043 M Scan Shift Right Y ENG 044 S Scan Shift Left Y ENG 21000 to 21000 ...

Page 818: ...rected by the automatic line position adjustment do this SP Increasing a value reduces the image in the main scan direction Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction 002 M Magnification ENG 003 Y Magnification ENG 004 M Scan Std Dot C ENG 511 to 511 0 1 dot step 005 M Scan Std Subdot C ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 006 M Scan Middle Dot C ENG 511 to 511 0 1 dot step 007 M Scan...

Page 819: ...ine C ENG 800 to 800 0 1 line 025 S Scan Middle Sub Line C ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 026 S Scan Low Line C ENG 1600 to 1600 1 1 line 027 S Scan Low Sub Line C ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 028 S Scan Std Line M ENG 800 to 800 0 1 line 029 S Scan Std SubLine M ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 030 S Scan Middle Line M ENG 800 to 800 0 1 line 031 S Scan Middle Sub Line M ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line 032 S Scan Low Line M ...

Page 820: ...olean step 0 Adjusted with Bk 1 Adjusted in minimum shift among four colors 2191 MUSIC Coeff Setting DFU Position Adjustment Coefficient Setting ch 0 ID sensor at rear ch 1 ID sensor at center ch 2 ID sensor at front 001 ch 0 Filter Front a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 125869 1 bit step 002 ch 0 Filter Front a2 ENG 131071 to 131071 60488 1 bit step 003 ch 0 Filter Front b0 ENG 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit s...

Page 821: ...1071 84 1 bit step 019 ch 1 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 020 ch 1 Filter Rear b2 ENG 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 021 ch 2 Filter Front a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 125869 1 bit step 022 ch 2 Filter Front a2 ENG 131071 to 131071 60488 1 bit step 023 ch 2 Filter Front b0 ENG 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 024 ch 2 Filter Front b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 77 1 bit step 025 ch 2 Filter...

Page 822: ...ition Setting 001 Auto Execution ENG 0 or 1 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Enables disables the automatic line position adjustment 002 Page Job End BW FC ENG 0 to 999 500 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after job end 003 Page Job End FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after j...

Page 823: ... adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions 009 Time ENG 1 to 1440 300 1 minute step Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions 010 Magnification ENG 0 to 10 1 0 1 step Adjusts the magnifica...

Page 824: ...ENG 0 to 100 0 1 deg step 007 Execution Result ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Completed successfully 1 Failed 008 Number of Execution ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 times step 009 Number of Failure ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 times step 010 Error Result C ENG 0 to 9 0 1 step 0 Not done 1 Completed successfully 2 Cannot detect patterns 3 Fewer lines on the pattern than the target 4 Out of the adjustment range 5 to 9 Not used ...

Page 825: ...pment DC Bias Adjustment Adjusts the development bias Developmentbiasisautomaticallyadjustedduringprocesscontrol therefore adjustingthese settings has no effect while Process Control SP3 041 001 Default ON is activated After deactivating Process Control with SP3 041 001 the values in these SP modes are used for printing 001 Bk ENG 0 to 800 450 1 V step 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 2241 Temperatur...

Page 826: ... 0 01 g m3 step Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML 004 Absolute Humidity Threshold 2 ENG 0 to 100 8 0 01 g m3 step Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM 005 Absolute Humidity Threshold 3 ENG 0 to 100 16 0 01 g m3 step Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH 006 Absolute Humidity Threshold 4 ENG 0 to 100 24 0 01 g m3 step Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH 007 Te...

Page 827: ...r Transfer ENG Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller between images 0 to 230 0 1 A step 2316 Power ON Bias DFU 001 Image Transfer ENG 0 to 80 5 1 A step Adjusts the bias of the image transfer roller at power on or a closed cover 2326 Paper Transfer Roller CL Bias DFU Paper Transfer Roller Cleaning Bias Adjustment 001 Positive before and after JOB ENG 0 to 2100 1000 10 V step Adjusts the po...

Page 828: ... Bias DFU Image Transfer Belt Full Color Bias Adjustment Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Image Transfer Standard Spd Bk ENG 0 to 80 26 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper 002 Image Transfer Standard Spd C ENG 0 to 80 22 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain pa...

Page 829: ...ull color mode for thick 1 paper 011 Image Transfer Low Speed M ENG 0 to 80 6 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper 012 Image Transfer Low Speed Y ENG 0 to 80 6 1 A Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1 paper 2360 Common BW Env Correction Table DFU 001 Image Transfer Standard Spd ENG 1 t...

Page 830: ...0 2000 10 V step 002 Separation DC Standard Spd 2nd ENG 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 004 Separation DC Low Spd 2nd ENG 2403 Plain1 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in black and white mode Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 21 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 230 23 1 A step 003 Paper Transf...

Page 831: ... S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1st S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 995...

Page 832: ...9 mm S4 size Paper width 2412 Plain1 SizeCorrect FC DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG...

Page 833: ... Low 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 995 325 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1st S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2413 P...

Page 834: ...r width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 100 14 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1st S2 ENG 1 to 100 38 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 100 11 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S3 ENG 1 to 100 19 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3...

Page 835: ...er roller current for each paper size SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 100 17 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 1 to 100 35 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd...

Page 836: ... 011 Paper Transfer Low 1st S3 ENG 1 to 100 36 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 100 77 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S4 ENG 1 to 100 79 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1st S4 ENG 1 to 100 35 1 step 139 mm S4 Pa...

Page 837: ...6 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2422 Plain1 Switch Timing L Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Transfer St...

Page 838: ... Standard 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2424 Plain1 Switch Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step ...

Page 839: ... 2nd ENG 019 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 020 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2439 Plain2 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain2 paper Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Separation DC Standard Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 002 Separation DC Standard Spd 2nd ENG 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 004 Separation DC Low Spd 2nd ENG 2440 Plain2 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the...

Page 840: ...rrect BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2440 and SP2441 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 005 Paper...

Page 841: ... mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2443 Plain2 Size Correct FC DFU Adjusts the siz...

Page 842: ...4 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 325 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper widt...

Page 843: ... ENG 1 to 100 19 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 8 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S2 ENG 1 to 100 19 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S2 ENG 1 to 100 8 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Tr...

Page 844: ...n coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2440 and SP2441 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 32 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 39 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 35 1 step S1 size 194 ...

Page 845: ...NG 1 to 100 16 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 1 to 100 35 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer Low 2 S3 ENG 1 to 100 28 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S4 ENG 1 to 100 32 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S4 ENG 1 to 100 39 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper ...

Page 846: ...tion DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2447 Plain2 SW Timing LE DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 00...

Page 847: ...n DC Standard 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2449 Plain2 SW Timing TE DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 P...

Page 848: ...01 Separation DC Standard Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 2453 Thin Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black and white mode Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 23 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2457 Thin Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper t...

Page 849: ...Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S3 ENG 100 to 600 135 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 ste...

Page 850: ...v Correct BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 16 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 21 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1...

Page 851: ... 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 9 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 26 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S2 ENG 1 to 100 9 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 26 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S3 ENG 1 to 100 9 1 ste...

Page 852: ...ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 005 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 0 to 995 200 5 step 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 2472 Thin Switch Timing L Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ...

Page 853: ...h Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 005 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 2480 Thin Environment Correction D...

Page 854: ...nsfer Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 9 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low Spd 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2507 Thick 1 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 24 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Middle Spd 2nd ENG Not used 003 Paper Transfer Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step ...

Page 855: ...NG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Middle 1st S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 siz...

Page 856: ... ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Middle 1st S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 m...

Page 857: ...Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2513 Thick1 Size Env Correct BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1st S1 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 P...

Page 858: ... step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 100 19 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 1 to 100 18 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer Low 2 S3 ENG 1 to 100 23 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Middle 1st S4 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Mid...

Page 859: ...dth 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 25 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Middle 1st S2 ENG 1 to 100 2 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 100 31 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 194 mm S2 ...

Page 860: ...NG 1 to 100 31 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 1 to 100 25 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2521 Thick 1 L Edge Correct DFU Thick 1 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these...

Page 861: ...Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Middle 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Middle 2nd ENG 007 Sep...

Page 862: ...dle 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Middle 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2524 Thick 1 Switch Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper T...

Page 863: ...f the discharge plate for thick 2 paper 003 Separation DC 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 004 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2553 Thick 2 Bias BW DFU Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 230 9 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2558 Thick 2 Bias FC DFU Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roll...

Page 864: ...5 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer 2 S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2562 Thick 2 Size Correction FC Adjusts the size correction coefficient...

Page 865: ...fer 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2563 Thick 2 Size Env Correction BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 003 Paper Transfer 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 18 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width...

Page 866: ...ent for each paper size SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 003 Paper Transfer 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 38 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer 2 S2 ENG 1 to 100 38 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 011 Paper Tran...

Page 867: ...DC 1st ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2572 Thick 2 Switch Timing L Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2mm step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 003 Separation DC 1st ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2573 Thick 2 T Edge Correction DFU Thick ...

Page 868: ... ENG 003 Separation DC 1st ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2580 Thick 2 Env Correct Table DFU 015 Separation DC 1st ENG 1 to 100 30 1 step 016 Separation DC 2nd ENG Thick 2 Edge Env Correct DFU 019 Separation DC 1st ENG 1 to 100 30 1 step 020 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2601 OHP Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP 001 Separation DC ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 2603 OHP Bias BW Adjus...

Page 869: ...ize 165 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2612 OHP Size Correct FC Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 003 Paper Transfer S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1...

Page 870: ...65 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 015 Paper Transfer S4 ENG 100 to 995 15 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2614 OHP Size Env Correct FC DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 003 Paper Transfer S1 ENG 1 to 100 12 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer S2 ENG 1 to 100 12 1 ste...

Page 871: ...a 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Separation DC ENG 2623 OHP T Edge Correct DFU OHP Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 002 Separation DC ENG 2...

Page 872: ...1 A step 2649 Thick3 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A step 2650 Thick3 Size Correct BW Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2648 and SP2649 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper ...

Page 873: ...aper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2648 and SP2649 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1 S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer 2 S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer 1 S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1 S3 EN...

Page 874: ...nsfer 2 S2 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer 1 S3 ENG 1 to 100 24 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer 2 S3 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer 1 S4 ENG 1 to 100 24 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 008 Paper Transfer 2 S4 ENG 1 to 100 22 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2653 Thick 3 Size Env Correct FC...

Page 875: ...7 Paper Transfer 1 S4 ENG 1 to 100 24 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 008 Paper Transfer 2 S4 ENG 1 to 100 27 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2654 Thick 3 L Edge Correct DFU Thick 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2648 and SP2649 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted...

Page 876: ...SP2649 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2657 001 Paper Transfer 1st ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd ENG 003 Separation DC 1st ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd ENG 2657 Thick 3 Switch Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin ar...

Page 877: ...sec Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 20 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A step 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 10 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2707 M Thick Bias FC Standard 260mm sec Low 85mm sec Adjusts the current for the paper ...

Page 878: ...de S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 ste...

Page 879: ...t for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2703 and SP2707 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 ste...

Page 880: ...andard 1Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2715 M Thick Size Env Correct BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer...

Page 881: ...ze 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 10 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S2 ENG 1 to 100 12 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S3 ENG 1 to 100 14 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S3 ENG 1 to 100 5 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Lo...

Page 882: ...dard 260mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 7 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 43 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 37 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 41 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S2 ENG 1 ...

Page 883: ...013 Paper Transfer Standard 1Side S4 ENG 1 to 100 7 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer Standard 2Side S4 ENG 1 to 100 43 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 1 to 100 37 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 1 to 100 41 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2721 M Thick L Edge Correct DFU Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Adjusts the correction to...

Page 884: ... the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2mm step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2723 M Thick T Edge Correct DFU Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Adjusts t...

Page 885: ... bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2mm step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st EN...

Page 886: ...sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Separation DC Standard Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 002 Separation DC Standard Spd 2nd ENG 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 004 Separation DC Low Spd 2nd ENG 2753 SP 1 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black and white mode Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 230 20 1 A step 002 Pape...

Page 887: ...2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S2 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 EN...

Page 888: ...4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 PaperTransfer Low 1st S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S4 ENG 100 to 995 330 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2762 SP1 Size Correct FC DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm s...

Page 889: ...35 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 995 325 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 PaperTransfer Low 1st S3 ENG 100 to 995 135 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 100 to 995 325 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 100 to 995 220 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width ...

Page 890: ...per Transfer Low 1st S1 ENG 1 to 100 10 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd S1 ENG 1 to 100 12 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S2 ENG 1 to 100 14 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S2 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1st S2 ENG 1 to 100 10 1 step 194 mm S2...

Page 891: ...idth 016 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S4 ENG 1 to 100 12 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2764 SP1 Size Env Correct FC DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S1 ENG 1 to 100 7 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Tran...

Page 892: ... step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 100 23 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 PaperTransfer Low 1st S3 ENG 1 to 100 37 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 PaperTransfer Low 2nd S3 ENG 1 to 100 39 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Standard 1st S4 ENG 1 to 100 7 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfe...

Page 893: ...2772 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2772 SP 1 Switch Timing L Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharg...

Page 894: ...to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2774 001 Paper Transfer Standard 1st ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer Standard 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Standar...

Page 895: ...ard 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2780 SP 1 Env Correct Table DFU Standard 260 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 013 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 1 to 100 30 1 step 014 Separation DC Standard 2nd ENG 015 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 016 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG SP 1 Edge Env Correct DFU 017 Separation DC Standard 1st ENG 1 to 100 50 1 step 018 Separation DC Standard 2nd EN...

Page 896: ...er Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2807 SP2 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in full color mode Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1st ENG 0 to 230 24 1 A step 002 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 18 1 A step 2811 SP 2 Size Correct B...

Page 897: ...p 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 009 Paper Transfer Middle 1Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Middle 2Side S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper widt...

Page 898: ...100 to 995 100 5 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Middle 2Side S1 ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 005 Paper Transfer Middle 1Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Middle 2Side S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 194 ...

Page 899: ...mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2813 SP 2 Size Env Correct BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Middle 182 mm sec Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1Side S1 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Pa...

Page 900: ... step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 010 Paper Transfer Middle 2Side S3 ENG 1 to 100 19 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 011 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 1 to 100 18 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 012 Paper Transfer Low 2 S3 ENG 1 to 100 23 1 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 013 Paper Transfer Middle 1Side S4 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 014 Paper Transfer...

Page 901: ...3 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 004 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 25 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Middle 1Side S2 ENG 1 to 100 2 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Middle 2Side S2 ENG 1 to 100 31 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 194 mm S2 si...

Page 902: ...S4 ENG 1 to 100 31 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 015 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 1 to 100 13 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 016 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 1 to 100 25 1 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2821 SP 2 L Edge Correct DFU Special 2 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by th...

Page 903: ...the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Transfer Middle 2nd ENG 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 005 Separation DC Middle 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Middle 2nd ENG 0...

Page 904: ...iddle 1st ENG 006 Separation DC Middle 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2824 SP 2 Switch Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Middle 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 002 Paper Tr...

Page 905: ...ge of the discharge plate for special paper 3 Low 85 mm sec 003 Separation DC Low Spd 1st ENG 0 to 6000 2000 10 V step 004 Separation DC Low Spd 2nd ENG 2852 SP3 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in black and white mode Low 85 mm sec 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 230 9 1 A step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 0 to 230 12 1 A step 2857 SP 3 Bias FC A...

Page 906: ...r Low 2 S2 ENG 100 to 995 160 5 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 005 Paper Transfer Low 1 S3 ENG 100 to 995 150 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 006 Paper Transfer Low 2 S3 ENG 100 to 995 270 5 step 165 mm S3 size 139 mm Paper width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2...

Page 907: ... width 007 Paper Transfer Low 1 S4 ENG 100 to 995 200 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 008 Paper Transfer Low 2 S4 ENG 100 to 995 435 5 step 139 mm S4 Paper width 2863 SP 3 Size Env Correct BW DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 24 ...

Page 908: ...ts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values Low 85mm sec 001 Paper Transfer Low 1 S1 ENG 1 to 100 24 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 002 Paper Transfer Low 2 S1 ENG 1 to 100 27 1 step S1 size 194 mm Paper width 003 Paper Transfer Low 1 S2 ENG 1 to 100 24 1 step 194 mm S2 size 165 mm Paper width 0...

Page 909: ...ese SP values Low 85 mm sec The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 995 100 5 step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2872 SP 3 Switch Timing L Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area...

Page 910: ...3 Switch Timing T Edge DFU Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Low 85 mm sec 003 Paper Transfer Low 1st ENG 0 to 50 0 2 mm step 004 Paper Transfer Low 2nd ENG 007 Separation DC Low 1st ENG 008 Separation DC Low 2nd ENG 2880 SP 3 Env Correct Table DFU Low 85 mm sec 015 Separat...

Page 911: ...image transfer belt motor reverses after job end 003 Transfer All ENG 0 to 800 70 10 msec step 2906 Drum Phase Angle DFU 001 Y ENG 0 to 359 0 1 deg step 002 M ENG 003 C ENG 004 K ENG 005 Color ENG Drum Amplitude Setting DFU 006 Y ENG 0 to 100 0 0 1 m step 007 M ENG 008 C ENG 009 K ENG 010 Color ENG Drum Stop Position DFU 011 K ENG 0 to 359 0 1 deg step 012 Color ENG System SP2 xxx 165 3 CÓPIA NÃO ...

Page 912: ...e transfer belt does not move away 001 Bk Image Count ENG 0 to 10 0 1 sheet step 2911 Offset Phase DFU 001 Y Drum ENG 0 to 359 0 1 deg step 002 M Drum ENG 003 C Drum ENG 004 K Drum ENG 2912 Offset Gain DFU 001 Y Drum ENG 0 to 100 0 0 1 m step 002 M Drum ENG 003 C Drum ENG 004 K Drum ENG 2915 GainAdj BkOpcDevM DFU 002 260 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 High speed 1 Low speed 003 182 mm sec ENG 0 or 1...

Page 913: ...on times of SC443 003 BkTransferMotorCtrl 85 ENG DFU 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 FG Control 1 ENC Control 2930 Transfer Bias Limit DFU Paper Transfer Roller Feed back Threshold Adjustment Adjusts the threshold between high resistance division 1 and low resistance division 2 at the paper transfer roller 001 Bias ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 2941 Dev Bias Down Mode DFU 001 T5 Bk Standard ENG 140 to 140 0 10 m...

Page 914: ...0 Process Interval DFU 001 Additional Time ENG 0 to 10 1 1 sec step 2971 BW Non Image Bias ON DFU 001 T1 BW Bias On Standard ENG 360 to 80 0 10 msec step 002 T1 BW Bias On Middle ENG 780 to 210 0 10 msec step 003 T1 BW Bias On Low ENG 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 168 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 915: ...er executing this SP 003 Pre ACC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC The type of process control is selected with SP3 041 004 004 Full MUSIC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally done atthesametimeasMUSIC ThisSPdoestheMUSIC line position adjustment twice 005 Normal MUSIC 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the process control that is normally ...

Page 916: ... 99999999 1 step 002 Result Latest 1 ENG 003 Result Latest 2 ENG 004 Result Latest 3 ENG 005 Result Latest 4 ENG 006 Result Latest 5 ENG 007 Result Latest 6 ENG 008 Result Latest 7 ENG 009 Result Latest 8 ENG 010 Result Latest 9 ENG 3013 T Sensor Initial Set Exe Developer Initialization Setting 001 Execution ALL Executes the developer initialization for each color 002 Execution COL 003 Execution B...

Page 917: ...cution ALL 0 or 1 0 1 step Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit 002 Execution COL 003 Execution Bk 004 Execution C 005 Execution M 006 Execution Y 3016 Forced Toner Supply Setting Forced Toner Supply Setting Color Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color 001 Supply Time Bk ENG 0 to 30 4 1 sec step 002 Supply Time C ENG 003 Supply Time M ENG 004 Supply Time Y ENG 30...

Page 918: ... the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization 001 Agitation Time Bk ENG 0 to 200 65 1 sec step 002 Agitation Time C ENG 003 Agitation Time M ENG 004 Agitation Time Y ENG 005 008 Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Flag OFF 1 Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor initializa...

Page 919: ...lues for the charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2 005 and SP2 229 1 CONTROL Enables or disables the process control 002 LD Power Control ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED at the value in SP2221 xxx 1 CONTROL adjusted by process control Selects the LD power control mode 003 Auto Control Prohibition Set ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Permit 1 Forbid 004 Pre ACC Process Control ENG 0 to ...

Page 920: ...m number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer initialization 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled 003 Repeat Number Non use ENG 0 to 9 0 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repe...

Page 921: ...sumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled 007 Repeat Number Interrupt ENG 0 to 9 0 1 time step 008 Toner Supply Coefficient ENG 0 to 25 5 10 0 1 sec step Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to be low 009 Consumption pattern Bk ENG 0 to 255 5 1 time step Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when tone...

Page 922: ...er consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 001 exceed the target values SP3611 005 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 019 Consumption Pattern LD DUTY C ENG 0 to 15 15 1 step Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mod...

Page 923: ...ep Alphanumeric 0 FIXED withthesupplyratesstoredwithSP3401 1 PID Vtref_Fixed 2 PID Vtref_Control 3 MBD Vtref_Fixed 4 MBD Vtref_Control 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 3045 Toner End Detection Set DFU Enables disables the toner alert display on the LCD 001 ON OFF ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Detect 1 Not Detect 3101 Toner End Near End DFU Displays the amount of each color toner 001 Toner Replenishment Bk EN...

Page 924: ...ld When one of these SPs SP3 101 009 to 012 or 032 to 035 reaches this threshold toner near end is detected 013 Near End Thresh Bk ENG 0 to 600 45 1 g step 014 Near End Thresh C ENG 015 Near End Thresh M ENG 016 Near End Thresh Y ENG 021 Delta Vt Threshold ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step This SP is the threshold for toner end Delta Vt Vt Vtref When both this SP and SP3 101 026 occur at same time toner en...

Page 925: ... ENG 0 to 1 0 679 0 001 mg cm2 step 041 Pixel M A C ENG 0 to 1 0 638 0 001 mg cm2 step 042 Pixel M A M ENG 043 Pixel M A Y ENG 044 Delta Vt Thresh Before Near End ENG Adjusts the delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end before toner near end is detected 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 045 Delta Vt Sum Thresh Before Near End ENG Adjusts the total delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end before toner near end is detected 0 to 255...

Page 926: ... 1 time step 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 3201 TD Sensor Vt Display Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 0 01 V step 002 Current C ENG 003 Current M ENG 004 Current Y ENG 3211 Vt Shift Display Set Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec 001 Med Speed Shift Bk ENG 0 to 5 0 46 0 01 V step 002 Med Spe...

Page 927: ...w TC Shift Bk ENG 014 Low TC Shift C ENG 015 Low TC Shift M ENG 016 Low TC Shift Y ENG 3221 Vtcnt Display Set Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color 001 260 Current Bk ENG 2 45 to 5 3 7 0 01 V step 002 260 Current C ENG 003 260 Current M ENG 004 260 Current Y ENG 005 008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization DFU 005 260 Initial Bk ENG 2 ...

Page 928: ...ENG 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 002 Current C ENG 003 Current M ENG 004 Current Y ENG 005 Initial Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 006 Initial C ENG 007 Initial M ENG 008 Initial Y ENG 009 Pixel Correction Bk ENG 5 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 010 Pixel Correction C ENG 011 Pixel Correction M ENG 5 to 5 0 0 01 V step 012 Pixel Correction Y ENG 3223 Vtref Upper Lower Limit Set DFU Adjusts the lower or upper limit ...

Page 929: ...C ENG Adjusts the lower limit of the toner concentration 1 to 15 4 0 1 wt step 012 Upper Sensitivity ENG Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 to 0 5 0 44 0 001 V wt step 013 Lower Sensitivity ENG Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 to 0 5 0 209 0 001 V wt step 014 Toner Density Between H and M ENG 1 to 10 4 0 1 wt step 015 TonerDensityBetweenMand L ENG 3224...

Page 930: ...High Coverage Thresh M ENG Adjusts the threshold of the high coverage 0 to 100 30 1 step 011 TC Upper Limit Correction ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 1 wt step 012 TC Upper Limit Display Bk ENG 1 to 15 10 0 1 wt step 013 TC Upper Limit Display C ENG 014 TC Upper Limit Display M ENG 015 TC Upper Limit Display Y ENG 016 Process Control Thresh ENG 0 to 255 15 1 time step 3230 Toner Supply MBD DFU 001 ADD Time ENG ...

Page 931: ...tep 039 PID I LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 33 0 01 step 040 PID P MidSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 7 0 01 step 041 PID P LowSpd ENG 0 to 5 0 33 0 01 step 060 AWILOW K ENG 1 to 1 0 125 0 0001 step 061 AWILOW C ENG 062 AWILOW M ENG 063 AWILOW Y ENG 064 AWPUP K ENG 1 to 1 1 0 0001 step 065 AWPUP C ENG 066 AWPUP M ENG 067 AWPUP Y ENG 068 AWILOW MidSpd ENG 0 to 100 0 18 0 01 step 069 AWPUP MidSpd ENG 0 to 100 1 0 01 step 07...

Page 932: ...C ENG 112 ANCrefCons M ENG 113 ANCrefCons Y ENG 120 ANCY K ENG 0 to 10 0 69 0 01 step 121 ANCY C ENG 0 to 10 0 8 0 01 step 122 ANCY M ENG 0 to 10 0 84 0 01 step 123 ANCY Y ENG 0 to 10 0 88 0 01 step 124 ANCT K ENG 0 to 10 0 6 0 01 step 125 ANCT C ENG 0 to 10 0 7 0 01 step 126 ANCT M ENG 0 to 10 0 73 0 01 step 127 ANCT Y ENG 0 to 10 0 77 0 01 step 128 ANCY MidSpd ENG 0 to 10 1 07 0 01 step 129 ANCT...

Page 933: ...ENG 0 to 10 0 6 0 01 step 183 ANCLA Y ENG 0 to 10 0 63 0 01 step 184 ANCLB K ENG 0 to 10 0 41 0 01 step 185 ANCLB C ENG 0 to 10 0 48 0 01 step 186 ANCLB M ENG 0 to 10 0 5 0 01 step 187 ANCLB Y ENG 0 to 10 0 52 0 01 step 188 ANCLA Midspd ENG 0 to 5 0 86 0 01 step 189 ANCLB Midspd ENG 0 to 5 0 7 0 01 step 190 ANCLA Lowspd ENG 0 to 5 0 55 0 01 step 191 ANCLB Lowspd ENG 0 to 5 0 31 0 01 step System SP...

Page 934: ... AVE ENG 1 to 5 2 1 step 240 PID I LIM Std ENG 0 to 1 0 154 0 001 step 241 PID I LIM LowSpd ENG 0 to 1 0 05 0 001 step 242 PID I STD to Low ENG 0 to 5 0 33 0 01 step 243 PID I Low to STD ENG 0 to 5 3 06 0 01 step 244 PID I LIM MidSpd ENG 0 to 1 0 108 0 001 step 245 PID I STD to MID ENG 0 to 5 0 7 0 01 step 246 PID I MID to STD ENG 0 to 5 1 43 0 01 step 247 PID I MID to Low ENG 0 to 5 0 47 0 01 ste...

Page 935: ...004 Vt Proportion Y ENG 005 Pixel Proportion Bk ENG 0 to 2 55 0 58 0 01 step 006 Pixel Proportion C ENG 0 to 2 55 0 51 0 01 step 007 Pixel Proportion M ENG 0 to 2 55 0 52 0 01 step 008 Pixel Proportion Y ENG 0 to 2 55 0 54 0 01 step 009 Vt Integral Control Bk ENG 0 to 2550 500 1 step 010 Vt Integral Control C ENG 011 Vt Integral Control M ENG 012 Vt Integral Control Y ENG 013 Vt Sum Times Bk ENG 1...

Page 936: ... Proportion 2 Bk ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 002 Pixel Proportion 2 C ENG 003 Pixel Proportion 2 M ENG 004 Pixel Proportion 2 Y ENG 005 Pixel Proportion 3 Bk ENG 0 7 to 1 3 1 0 01 step 006 Pixel Proportion 3 C ENG 007 Pixel Proportion 3 M ENG 008 Pixel Proportion 3 Y ENG 009 Vt Integral Value Bk ENG 255 to 255 0 0 01 step 010 Vt Integral Value C ENG 011 Vt Integral Value M ENG 012 Vt Integral Value ...

Page 937: ...t developer initialization 001 Bk ENG 0 to 5 2 7 0 01 V step 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 3239 Vtref Correction Setting Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control 001 Consumption Bk ENG 0 to 1 0 08 0 01 V step 002 Consumption C ENG 003 Consumption M ENG 004 Consumption Y ENG 005 Consumption Bk ENG 006 Consumption C ENG 007 Consumption M ENG 008 Consumption Y ENG 009 012 Thr...

Page 938: ...0 to 1000 0 1 step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 0 001 x these vales SP3 241 005 to 008 002 Coefficient C ENG 003 Coefficient M ENG 004 Coefficient Y ENG 005 Offset Bk ENG These are additional values for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at process control 0 to 255 158 1 V step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 0 001 x SP3 241 001 to 004 these values 006 Offset ...

Page 939: ...ENG 015 Middle Speed Offset M ENG 016 Middle Speed Offset Y ENG 017 Low Speed Coeff Bk ENG 1000 to 1000 123 1 step 018 Low Speed Coeff C ENG 019 Low Speed Coeff M ENG 020 Low Speed Coeff Y ENG 021 Low Speed Offset Bk ENG 1000 to 1000 16 1 step 022 Low Speed Offset C ENG 023 Low Speed Offset M ENG 024 Low Speed Offset Y ENG 3243 Development Bias Speed Correct Setting DFU 001 Middle Speed Coef Bk EN...

Page 940: ...G 3251 Coverage These 001 to 016 are coefficients for SP3 222 009 to 012 001 Latest Pixcel Bk ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color 0 to 9999 0 1 cm2 step 002 Latest Pixcel C ENG 003 Latest Pixcel M ENG 004 Latest Pixcel Y ENG 005 008 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction Average S is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number spec...

Page 941: ...e L C ENG 015 Average L M ENG 016 Average L Y ENG 017 019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3 251 005 to 016 017 Total Page Setting S ENG 1 to 100 50 1 sheet step 018 Total Page Setting M ENG 1 to 500 10 1 sheet step 019 Total Page Setting L ENG 1 to 999 50 1 sheet step 020 022 Adjusts the threshold for SP3 251 024 to 027 020 Total Page Setting S2 ENG 1 to 100 20 1 sheet step 021 Total Page Setting M2 E...

Page 942: ...ensor diffusion offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 005 Voffset dif C ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 006 Voffset dif M ENG 007 Voffset dif Y ENG 008 010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 008 Voffset TM Front ENG 0 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 009 Voffset TM Center ENG 010 Voffset TM Rear ENG 3321 Vsg Adjust Exe 010 P TM Sensor All Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for all sen...

Page 943: ... DFU 001 Ifsg Bk ENG 0 to 50 0 0 1 mA step 002 Ifsg C ENG 003 Ifsg M ENG 004 Ifsg Y ENG 005 Ifsg TM Front ENG 006 Ifsg TM Center ENG 007 Ifsg TM Rear ENG 3324 Vsg Adjustment Set DFU 003 Vsg Error Counter ENG 0 to 99 0 0 1 time step 004 Vofset Threshold ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 V step 005 Vsg Upper Threshold ENG 0 to 5 4 5 0 01 V step 006 Vsg Lower Threshold ENG 0 to 5 3 5 0 01 V step System SP3 xxx 197 3...

Page 944: ... K 002 Latest 1 ENG 003 Latest 2 ENG 004 Latest 3 ENG 005 Latest 4 ENG 006 Latest 5 ENG 007 Latest 6 ENG 008 Latest 7 ENG 009 Latest 8 ENG 010 Latest 9 ENG 3361 ID Sensor Sensitivity Display DFU 003 K2C Latest ENG 0 to 5 0 0 0001 step 004 K5C Latest ENG 005 K2M Latest ENG 006 K5M Latest ENG 007 K2Y Latest ENG 008 K5Y Latest ENG 3362 ID Sensor Sensitivity Setting DFU 001 K2 Upper ENG 0 to 1 0 32 0 ...

Page 945: ...13 Diffusion Correction C ENG 0 75 to 1 35 1 0 01 step 014 Diffusion Correction M ENG 015 Diffusion Correction Y ENG 016 K2 Check C ENG 0 to 1 0 25 0 001 step 017 K2 Check M ENG 018 K2 Check Y ENG 3363 ID Pattern Timing Setting DFU 001 Scan YCMBk ENG Adjusts the detection timing for the process control pattern 500 to 500 0 1 mm step 002 Detection Delay Time ENG Adjusts the timing when the paper tr...

Page 946: ...rect Coeff C ENG 007 Color Correct Coeff M ENG 008 Color Correct Coeff Y ENG 3401 Fixed Toner Supply Mode Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode 001 Fixed Rate Bk ENG 0 to 100 5 1 step These SPs are used only when SP3 044 is set to 0 002 Fixed Rate C ENG 003 Fixed Rate M ENG 004 Fixed Rate Y ENG 3411 Toner Supply Rate Display Displays the current toner supply rate 001 Latest ...

Page 947: ...1 Bk ENG Displays the toner supply time carried over from a previous toner supply mode for each color 0 to 10000 0 1 msec step 002 C ENG 003 M ENG 004 Y ENG 3452 Toner Supply Carry Over Setting DFU 001 Maximum Bk ENG Adjusts the maximum time carried over from a previous toner supply mode 0 to 10000 1000 1 msec step 002 Maximum C ENG 003 Maximum M ENG 004 Maximum Y ENG 3453 Toner Supply Setting Adj...

Page 948: ...Power ON BW ENG 004 Power ON FC ENG 005 MUSIC BW ENG 006 MUSIC FC ENG 007 Vsg Adj ENG 008 Charge AC Control ENG 009 MUSIC Power ON BW ENG 010 MUSIC Power ON FC ENG 3511 Execution Interval Setting Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode 001 Job End Process Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 250 1 page step 002 Job End Process Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 85 1 page step 003 Interrupt Process Control BW ENG...

Page 949: ...1 0 01 step 027 Correction Coeff 2 Interrupt BW ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 028 Correction Coeff 1 Interrupt FC ENG 0 to 1 0 25 0 01 step 029 Correction Coeff 2 Interrupt FC ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step 030 Max Number Correction Threshold ENG 0 to 99 5 1 step 031 Max Number Correction Counter ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 3512 Image Adj Interval Adjuststhetimingforexecutionofprocesscontrolandlinepositionadjustmentdu...

Page 950: ... 001 Job End Process Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 002 Job End Process Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step 003 Interrupt Process Control BW ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 004 Interrupt Process Control FC ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step 3516 Refresh Mode DFU Whilemakingprintswithlowcoverage thedeveloperisagitatedwithlesstonerconsumption and the toner carrier attraction tends to increas...

Page 951: ...Threshold M ENG 017 Refresh Threshold Y ENG 018 Pattern Number Bk ENG 0 to 255 0 1 time step 019 Pattern Number C ENG 020 Pattern Number M ENG 021 Pattern Number Y ENG 022 Pattern Number Upper limit ENG 0 to 255 16 1 time step 023 Toner Consumption Pattern Area ENG 10 to 2550 130 10 cm2 step 024 Supply Coefficient ENG 0 to 2 55 0 8 0 01 step 025 Job End Area Coefficient ENG 0 1 to 25 5 1 0 1 step ...

Page 952: ...tion Temp Thresh ENG 0 to 50 0 1 deg step 3518 Image Adj Execution Flag DFU 001 Toner End Recovery Bk ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Toner End Recovery C ENG 003 Toner End Recovery M ENG 004 Toner End Recovery Y ENG 005 Vsg Adjustment ENG 006 Developer Mixing ENG 007 Process Control ENG 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON once 2 ON twice 008 MUSIC ENG 009 Drum Phase Adj ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 0...

Page 953: ... temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the process control 005 Temp Thresh T2 ENG 20 or 30 25 1 deg step 006 Temp Thresh T1 ENG 0 or 15 15 1 deg step 3522 Initial Process Control Setting Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation the ...

Page 954: ...umidity Rhange ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m3 step 005 Maximum Execution Number ENG Adjusts the maximum execution time for the process control at stand by 0 to 99 10 1 time step 3611 Dev Gamma Display Set 001 Bk Current ENG Displays the current development gamma for Bk 0 to 5 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 002 C Current ENG Displays the current development gamma for C M Y 0 to 5 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 003 M Current E...

Page 955: ...tion ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development gamma 0 or 1 1 0 Not Correct 1 Correct 014 Bk Max Correction ENG 0 to 5 0 23 0 01 mg cm2 kv step 015 C Max Correction ENG 016 M Max Correction ENG 017 Y Max Correction ENG 018 Bk Max Abs Hum ENG 1 to 99 10 1 g m3 step 019 C Max Abs Hum ENG 020 M Max Abs Hum ENG 021 Y Max Abs Hum ENG 3612 Vk Display Displays Vk for each co...

Page 956: ...dard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 005 Middle Speed Bk ENG 006 Middle Speed C ENG 007 Middle Speed M ENG 008 Middle Speed Y ENG 009 Low Speed Bk ENG 010 Low Speed C ENG 011 Low Speed M ENG 012 Low Speed Y ENG 3631 Charge DC Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color 3 Appe...

Page 957: ...NG 012 Low Speed Y ENG 3641 Charge AC Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color 001 Standard Speed Bk ENG 0 to 3 1 75 0 01 kV step 002 Standard Speed C ENG 003 Standard Speed M ENG 004 Standard Speed Y ENG 3651 LD Power Control Display Standard 260 mm sec Middle 182 mm sec Low 85 mm sec Displays the LD power adjusted for eac...

Page 958: ...trol Setting Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory which is in the TD sensor 001 Control Method Selection ENG 0 or 1 1 0 Not Use 1 Use 3711 HST Concentration Control Bk Displays the factory settings of the black PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 1 22 to 3 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V...

Page 959: ...ntrol C Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU 001 Vcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step 002 Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 1 22 to 3 77 2 5 0 01 V step 004 Sensitivity HM ENG 0 to 2 55 1 3 0 01 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 2 55 1 2 0 01 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1...

Page 960: ...ion ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 ENG 0 to 255 1 V step 010 Serial Number 2 ENG 011 Adjustment Vt ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 012 Adjustment Vtref ENG 013 260 Adjustment Vtcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 014 Adjustment Gamma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 015 Vcnt latest Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 s...

Page 961: ...djustment Gamma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm2 kV step 015 Vcnt latest Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step 016 182 Adjustment Vtcnt ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 3800 Collection Bottle Full Detect Displays adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings 001 Condition ENG 0 to 4 0 1 step Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle 0 Factory default 1 Before near full 2 Near full 3...

Page 962: ...he near full detection for the PCDU toner collection bottle 3810 P Inter Exit HlfSpd DFU 001 Formula Slope ENG 0 to 100 10 1 step 002 Formula Intercept ENG 2000 to 2000 0 1 step 003 Formula Up Limit ENG 100 to 2000 100 1 step 3901 New Unit Detection Turns new PCU detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON 3902 Manual New Unit Set Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM un...

Page 963: ...nly change the cleaning unit 3902 015 This is for the image transfer belt cleaning unit 014 Fusing Unit ENG 015 Fusing Roller ENG 016 Fusing Belt ENG 017 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit ENG 018 Paper Transfer Unit ENG 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 020 Image Transfer Toner Collection Bottle ENG System SP3 xxx 217 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 964: ...by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan direction 001 ENG 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm step FA 4012 Set Scale Mask Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap between the original and the scale 001 Book Sub Leading Edge ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA 002 Book Sub Trailing Edge 003 Book Main Leading Edge 004 Book Main Trailing Edge 4013 Scanner Free Run...

Page 965: ...t check on off 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Dust Detect Level ENG Selects the detect level 0 to 8 4 1 step 0 lowest detection level 8 highest detection level 003 Dust Reject Level ENG Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF 0 to 4 0 1 step 0 Off 1 Weakest 2 Weak 3 Strong 4 Strongest 4400 Org Edge Mask ENG Set the Mask for Original These SPs set the area to be masked...

Page 966: ...dation main scan D 5 Gradation sub scan 1 6 Grid pattern 7 Slant grid pattern 8 Gradation RGBCMYK 9 UCR pattern 10 Color patch 16 1 11 Color patch 16 2 12 Color patch 64 13 Grid pattern CMYK 14 Color patch CMYK 15 Gray pattern 1 16 Gray pattern 2 17 Gray Pattern 3 18 Shading pattern 19 Thin line pattern 20 Scanned Grid pattern 21 Scanned Gray scale 22 Scanned Color patch 23 Scanned Slant Grid C 24...

Page 967: ...mit Value ENG 0 to 1023 364 1 step 002 Background Level 512 to 1535 932 1 step 4501 ACC Target Density Selects the ACC result 001 Copy K Text ENG 0 to 10 5 1 step 10 Darkest density 002 Copy C Text ENG 003 Copy M Text ENG 004 Copy Y Text ENG 005 Copy K Photo ENG 006 Copy C Photo ENG 007 Copy M Photo ENG 008 Copy Y Photo ENG 4505 ACC Cor Bright Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the A...

Page 968: ...ion for dark areas of the ACC pattern 001 Text K ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 002 Text C ENG 003 Text M ENG 004 Text Y ENG 005 Photo K ENG 128 to 127 0 1 step 006 Photo C ENG 007 Photo M ENG 008 Photo Y ENG 4540 Print Coverage This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues RY YR YG etc x 4 Colors R G B Option for a total of 48 parameters 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 222 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO ...

Page 969: ... BC Phase Option R G B ENG 033 036 BM Phase Option R G B ENG 037 040 MB Phase Option R G B ENG 041 044 MR Phase Option R G B ENG 045 048 RM Phase Option R G B ENG 049 052 WHITE Option R G B ENG 053 056 BLACK Option R G B ENG 4550 Scanner Appl Text Print DFU 4551 Scanner Appl Text DFU 4552 Scanner Appl Txt Dropout DFU 4553 Scanner Appl Text Photo DFU 4554 Scanner Appl Photo DFU 4565 Scanner Appl Gr...

Page 970: ...lay 001 SBU ID Displays the ID of the SBU 002 GASBU N ID Displays the ID of the GASBU 003 VSP5100 ID Displays t he ID of the VSP5100 4602 Scanner Memory Access 001 Scanner Memory Access Enables the read and write check for the SBU registers 4603 AGC Execution 001 HP Detection Enable Executes the AGC 002 HP Detection Disable DFU 4604 FGATE Open Close DFU 4609 Gray Balance Set R 3 Appendix SP Mode T...

Page 971: ...383 0 1 digit step 002 Latest RO Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4624 Black Level Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 001 Latest GE Color Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 1...

Page 972: ...controller for Red 001 Latest RE Color 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4629 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green 001 Latest GE Color 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4630 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue 001 Latest BE Color 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4631 Digital Gain Adj Display Displays the gain value of t...

Page 973: ...step 0 OK Other SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails SC144 occurs 4654 Black Level Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value RE Color ENG Displays the black offset value for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Last Correct Value RO Color ENG Displays the black offset value for the od...

Page 974: ...3 0 1 digit step 002 Last Correct Value BO Color ENG Displays the black offset value for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4658 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red 001 Last Correct Value RE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4659 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the previous gain...

Page 975: ...ignal RO Red Odd signal 001 Factory Setting RE Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 002 Factory Setting RO Color ENG Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 ...

Page 976: ...black level adjustmentfortheoddbluesignalintheCCDcircuit board color printing speed 0 to 16383 0 1 digit step 4677 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red 001 Factory Setting RE Color ENG 0 to 7 0 1 digit step 4678 Analog Gain Adj Display Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green 001 Factory Setting GE Color ENG 0 to 7 0...

Page 977: ...G 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 Latest BO Color ENG 4688 DF Density Adjustment Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different 001 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step 4690 White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning 001 RE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 RO 4691 White ...

Page 978: ...level scanning 001 GE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 GO 4695 Black Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the black level scanning 001 BE 0 to 1023 0 1 digit step 002 BO 4802 DF Shading FreeRun 001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or off Press OFF to stop this free run Otherwise the free run lasts 002 Lamp ON 4804 Home Position Operation 001 Execut...

Page 979: ...y Setting Input DFU 002 Execution Flag 0 or 1 0 1 step 4810 PWM DFU 4811 LED White Level Peak Read DFU 4812 LED White Level Peak Read DFU 4902 ACC Data Display This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data 0 to 255 0 1 step 001 R DATA1 ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 8 bit 002 G DATA1 ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 8 bit 003 B DATA1 ...

Page 980: ...08 For details see the Printer Gamma Correction in the section Replace and Adjustment 4991 IPU Image Path Selection Selects the image path Enter the number to be selected using the 10 key pad 001 RGB Frame Memory ENG 0 to 11 2 1 step 0 Scanner input RGB images 1 Scanner I F RGB images 2 RGB images done by Shading correction Shading ON Black offset ON 3 Shading data 4 to 11 Not used 4993 High Light...

Page 981: ... Photo Detection Level Adj Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF 001 High Compression PDF ENG 0 to 2 1 1 step 0 Text priority 1 Normal 2 Photo priority 4996 White Paper Detect Level Adjusts the white paper detect level for fax 001 ENG 0 to 6 3 1 step System SP4 xxx 235 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 982: ... once regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive 001 Counter Method CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Developments 1 Prints 5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Enables or disables the toner refill detection display 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 Alphanumeric 0 ON 1 OFF 5055 Display IP Address Display or does not display the IP address on the operation panel 001 CTL 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON 3 Appendix SP Mode Table...

Page 983: ...r does not display the PM part yield on the LCD 001 PCU Bk CTL 0 or 1 0 0 No display 1 Display 002 PCU M CTL 003 PCU C CTL 004 PCU Y CTL 005 Development Unit Bk CTL 0 or 1 0 0 No display 1 Display 006 Development Unit M CTL 007 Development Unit C CTL 008 Development Unit Y CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt CTL 0 or 1 0 0 No display 1 Display 014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit CTL 015 Fusing Unit CTL 016 P...

Page 984: ...0 Service or 1 User 006 Dev Unit M CTL 007 Dev Unit C CTL 008 Dev Unit Y CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt CTL 0 Service or 1 User 014 Image Transfer Cleaning CTL 0 Service or 1 User 015 Fusing Unit CTL 0 Service or 1 User 016 PTR Unit CTL 0 Service or 1 User 017 WasteToner Bottle CTL 0 Service or 1 User 018 Fusing Roller CTL 0 Service or 1 User 019 Fusing Belt CTL 0 Service or 1 User 5071 Set Bypass Pa...

Page 985: ... specifies the external counter type 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5114 Optional Counter I F 001 MF Key Card Extension CTL 0 Not installed 1 Installed scanning accounting 5118 Disable Copying CTL 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled 001 This program disables copying 5120 Mode Clear Opt Counter Removal CTL 0 Yes removed 1 Standby installed but not used 2 No not removed ...

Page 986: ...ng CTL 0 OFF 1 ON 001 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by pass tray is used or not Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by pass tray is limited to 600 mm but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm 5162 App Switch Method CTL 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set 001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program 5167 Fax Printing Mode at Optio...

Page 987: ...connection If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to 1 Enable the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops 001 EN G 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 5188 Copy Nv Version Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board 001 5191 Mode Set DFU 001 CTL 0 or 1 1 0 Off 1 On Enables or disables the STR Suspend to RAM mode 5195 Limitless SW DFU System ...

Page 988: ...her without stapling If this setting is 1 ON paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job over maximum number If this setting is 0 OFF paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job over maximum number 5212 Page Numbering CTL This program ad...

Page 989: ...pei AS 480 Hong Kong KO 540 Korea 002 Time Difference CTL 1440 to 1440 Area 1 min step 5307 Summer Time 001 Setting 0 to 1 NA EU ASIA 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled NA and EUR 1 ASIA 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode Make sure that both SP5 307 3 and 4 are correctly set Otherwise this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to 1 System SP5 xxx 243 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLA...

Page 990: ...or example 3500010 EU default The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0 00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 004 Rule Set End Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 0 to 5 4th digit The day of the week 0 to 7 Sunday to Satur...

Page 991: ... Certification Detail CTL Selects the log out type for the extend authentication device Bit 0 Log out without an IC card 0 Not allowed default 1 Allowed 200 SDK1 Unique ID CTL SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when installed or uninstalled 201 SDK1 Certification Method CTL 210 SDK2 Unique ID CTL 211 SDK2 Certification Method CTL 220 SDK3 Unique ID CTL 221 ...

Page 992: ...4 Easy Certification CTL Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done 0 to 1 1 1 1 On 0 Off 005 Password Null Not Permit CTL This SP is referenced only when SP5411 4 is set to 1 On 0 to 1 1 1 0 Password NULL not permitted 1 Password NULL permitted 006 Detail Option CTL 5413 Lockout Setting 001 Lockout On Off CTL Switches on off the lock on the local address book account 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On...

Page 993: ...to 9999 60 1 min 5414 Access Mitigation 001 Mitigation On Off CTL Switches on off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical 0 to 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Mitigation Time CTL Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords 0 to 60 15 1 min 5415 Password Attack 001 Permissible Number CTL Sets the number of attempts to attack the system...

Page 994: ...eatures 0 to 500 100 1 002 Attack Detect Time CTL Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features 10 to 30 10 1 sec 003 Productivity Fall Wait CTL Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certificationwhenanexcessivenumberofaccess attempts have been detected 0 to 9 3 1 sec 004 Attack Max Num CTL Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in...

Page 995: ...t5 to 7 Reserved 011 DocumentServer CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 021 Fax CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 031 Scanner CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 041...

Page 996: ...Change On Off CTL 0 or 1 0 1 002 Message Text Download 003 Message Text ID 5431 External Auth User Preset 010 Tag CTL 011 Entry 012 Group 020 Mail 030 Fax 031 Fax Sub 032 Folder 033 Protect Code 034 SMTP Auth 035 LDAP Auth 036 SMB FTP Folder Auth 037 Acnt Acl 038 Document Acl 040 Cert Crypt 050 User Limit Count 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 250 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 997: ... 0 Off 5490 MF KeyCard Japan only 001 Job Permit Setting CTL Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard 0 to 1 0 1 0 Disabled Cancels operation without a user code 1 Enabled Allows operation without a user code 002 Count Mode Setting CTL 5501 PM Alarm CTL 001 PM Alarm Level 0 to 9999 0 1 step 0 Alarm off 1 to 9999 Alarm goes off when Value 1 to 9999 x 1000 PM counter 002 Original Count Alarm ...

Page 998: ...xample default 1500 sheets The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches 5 001 CTL 0 to 255 32 100 copies step 5507 Supply Alarm CTL Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the Remote 001 Paper Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 002 Staple Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 003 Toner Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 006 Waste Toner Bottle Supply Alarm 0 Off 1 On 080 Toner Call Timing Changes the tim...

Page 999: ...time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 012 Jam Detection Continuous Count 2 to 10 5 1 step Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 013 Door Open Time Length 3 to 30 10 1 step Sets the length of time the door remains open before th...

Page 1000: ...ement Report Call 012 Jam Door Open Call Memory Clear SP5 801 The following tables list the items that are cleared The serial number information meter charge setting and meter charge counters are not cleared 5516 Individual PM Part Alarm Call 001 Disable Enable Setting 0 or 1 1 0 Not Send 1 Send 5610 Base Gamma Control Point Execute 004 Get Factory Default Recalls the factory settings 005 Set Fact...

Page 1001: ... in two color mode 004 G Y ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 005 R M ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 006 R Y ENG 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 5618 ...

Page 1002: ... Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings 006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings 007 Fax Application Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer 008 Printer Application The following service settings Bit switches Gamma settings User Service Toner Limit The following user settings Tray Priority Menu Protect System ...

Page 1003: ...trol Service settings 018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM System Resource Manager settings 019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings 020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings 5803 Input Check See Input Check Table in this section 5804 Output Check See Output Check Table in this section 5805 Anti Condensation Heater 0 Default setting The heater i...

Page 1004: ...hone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List which can be printed with the user s Counter menu This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input 002 Facsimile CTL Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic...

Page 1005: ...vice NOTE This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 003 Function Flag Enables or disables the remote service function 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled NOTE This SP setting is changed to 1 after Remote registor has been completed 007 SSL Disable Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Uses the RCG certification 1 Does no use the RCG ...

Page 1006: ... is received 1 RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode 021 RCG C Registed This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag 0 Installation not completed 1 Installation completed 023 Connect Type N M This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Internet connection 1 Dial up connection 061 Cert Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the e...

Page 1007: ...d RC Gate N and the gateway This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate N This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report 065 Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name The length of the name is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC r...

Page 1008: ...equest 13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL 14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller and the certification is being stored 15 The certification has been stored and the GW URL is being notified of the successf...

Page 1009: ...rmware before the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL 086 Firmware Size Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution 087 CERT Macro Version Displays the macro version of...

Page 1010: ...G M SP5816 153 SP5816 154 SP5816 161 0 Japan 1 USA 2 Canada 3 UK 4 Germany 5 France 6 Italy 7 Netherlands 8 Belgium 9 Luxembourg 10 Spain 151 Line Type Authentication Judgment Press Execute Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG M is connected as either dial up pulse dial or push DTMF tone type so embedded RCG M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to th...

Page 1011: ...ss ioctl occurred 8 Other error occurred 9 Line classification still in progress Please wait 153 Selection Dial Push This SP displays the classification tone or pulse of the telephone line to the access point for embedded RCG M The number displayed 0 or 1 is the result of the execution of SP5816 151 However this setting can also be changed manually 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dial...

Page 1012: ... and allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks 157 Dial Up Password Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up Follow these rules when setting a user name Name length Up to 32 characters Spaces and allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks 161 Local Phone Number Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where emb...

Page 1013: ...n 173 Modem Serial Number This SP displays the serial number registered for the RCG M 174 Retransmission Limit Normally it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests and for the notification that the certification has been completed However RCG M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transac...

Page 1014: ...mber Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the embedded RCG 203 Confirm Execute Executes the inquiry request to the Remote GW URL 204 Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203 0 Succeeded 1 Inquiry number error 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name o...

Page 1015: ...that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed Cause Code Meaning Illegal Modem Parameter 11001 Chat parameter error 11002 Chat execution error 11003 Unexpected error Operation Error Incorrect Setting 12002 Inquiry registration attempted without acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous regi...

Page 1016: ...8 Incorrect request number format 209 Remote Setting Clear Releases the machine from its embedded RCG setup 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log 5821 Remote Service Address 002 RCG IP Address CTL Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center 5824 NV RAM Data Upload Uploads the UP and SP mode data except for counters ...

Page 1017: ... Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 052 ECP Centro Enables or disables ECP Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This SP is activated only when SP5 828 50 is set to 1 065 Job Spooling Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 066 Job Spooling Clear Start Time Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on 0 ON Data is cleared 1 OFF ...

Page 1018: ...elnet protocol 0 or 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 091 Web 0 OFF 1 ON Enables or disables the Web operation 0 or 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Link Local Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 3 Appendix SP Mode...

Page 1019: ...s of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 158 IPv6 Gateway Address This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet orwirelessLAN 802 11b TheIPv6addressconsistsofatotal 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 236 Web Item visible D...

Page 1020: ...he URL name are 31 characters 240 Web Link1 URL This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters 241 Web Link1 visible Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system 0 to 1 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 242 Web Link2 Name Same as 239 243 Web Link2 URL Same as 240 244 Web Link2 visibl...

Page 1021: ...initialized displayed or selected 002 Panel Setting 0 Displayed 1 Not displayed Displays or does not display the capture function buttons 5836 71 to 5836 78 Copier and Printer Document Reduction The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 071 Reduction for Cop...

Page 1022: ...IFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 083 Format Copy B W Other 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 084 Format for Printer Color 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR This SP is not used in this model 085 Format for Printer B W 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 086 Format for Printer B W HQ 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 091 Default for JPEG 5 to 95 50 1 step Sets the JPEG f...

Page 1023: ...he remote system 0 600dpi 1 300dpi 2 150dpi 3 75dpi 122 Reso Copy Mono 0 to 5 3 1 step Selects the resolution for BW copy mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 123 Reso Print Color This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 to 3 2 1 step Selects the resolution for color print mode This is basically adjusted by the remote s...

Page 1024: ...elects the resolution for BW scanning mode This is basically adjusted by the remote system 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi 141 All Addr Info Switch 0 to 1 1 1 Switch this SP off if the system is performing slowly due to a large number of resources in use If this SP is switched off only 2000 documents can be queued for sending to the Capture Server See SP5836 142 below...

Page 1025: ...ansmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels EU 1 to 13 1 1 step NA AS 1 to 11 1 1 step AS 1 to 14 14 1 step 008 Transmission Speed CTL 0 x 00 to 0 x FF 0 x FF to Auto 0 x FF to Auto Default 0 x 11 55M Fix 0 x 10 ...

Page 1026: ...lf function is turned on or off 0 to 1 1 1 0 Off 1 On This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 044 11g Slot Time CTL Selects the slot time for IEEE802 11 0 to 1 0 1 0 20 m 1 9 m This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed 045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP is display...

Page 1027: ...er using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 002 Setting 2 CTL Adjusts the debug program modesetting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Minute Second Msec 0 to 6 Not used 5844 USB 001 Transfer Rate CTL Adjusts the USB transfer rate 0001 or 0004 0004 0001 Full speed 0004 Auto Change 002 Vendor ID CTL Displays the vendor ID 003 Product ID CTL Displays the product ID 004 Dev Rele...

Page 1028: ...play Time 0 to 999 300 1 second step Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device 008 IP Address Secondary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan ...

Page 1029: ... Changes the capability of the registered that the I O device registered Bit7 1 Address book usage limitation Limitation for each authorized user Bit6 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0 Not used 013 Server Scheme Primary DFU This is used for the scan router program 014 Server Port Number Primary DFU This is used for the scan router program 015 Server URL Path Primary DFU This is used for the scan ...

Page 1030: ...y cycling the machine off and on 003 Maximum Entries 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed 006 Delivery Server Retry Timer 0 to 255 0 1 step Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acq...

Page 1031: ... executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD However the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage Executing this SP by the service ...

Page 1032: ...alize All Addr Book Clears all directory information managed by UCS including all user codes 051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card 052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card 053 Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine This ...

Page 1033: ... access to the address book 063 Complexity Option 2 DFU 064 Complexity Option 3 DFU 065 Complexity Option 4 DFU 091 FTP Auth Port Setting Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server address book that is used in the identification mode 0 to 65535 3671 1 step 094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data 5847 Rep Resolution Reduction CTL SP584...

Page 1034: ...of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages This function is available only with the MLB Media Link Board option installed 5 to 95 50 1 step 5848 Web Service CTL SP5848 2 sets the 4 bit switch assignment for the access control setting Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router 5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 002 Ac...

Page 1035: ...inistration Lower 4bits 099 Repository Download Image Setting DFU 100 Repository Download Image Max Size Specifies the max size of the image data that the machine can download 1 to 1024 1024 1 MB step 210 Setting LogType Job1 DFU 211 Setting LogType Job2 212 Setting LogType Access 213 Setting Primary Srv 214 Setting Secondary Srv 215 Setting Start Time 216 Setting Interval Time 217 Setting Timing ...

Page 1036: ...etooth Mode Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit Press either key 0 Public 1 Private 5853 Stamp Data Download Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD This SP can be executed as many times as required This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed...

Page 1037: ...D Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card 006 Save to SD Card Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card 009 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB 010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key 011 Erase HDD Debug Data 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data 013 Free Space on SD Card 014 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB 015 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB Any Key 016 Make HDD Debug 017...

Page 1038: ... 004 Jam Turns on off the debug save for jam errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 5859 Debug Save Key No CTL 001 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board 9999999 to 9999999 0 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 005 Key 5 006 Key 6 007 Key 7 008 Key 8 009 Key 9 010 Key 10 5860 SMTP POP3 IMAP4 CTL 020 Partial Mail Receive Timeou...

Page 1039: ...er is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated 0 No From item not switched 1 Yes From item switched 025 SMTP Auth Direct Setting 0 or 1 0 Selects the authentication method for SMPT Bit switch Bit 0 LOGIN Bit 1 PLAIN Bit 2 CRAM MD5 Bit 3 DIGEST MD5 Bit 4 to 7 Not used This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode 026 S MIME MIME Header Setting S...

Page 1040: ...e the Initiralize 003 and Writing 001 just after the new board replacement NOTE Turn off and on the main power switch after the Initiralize 003 and Writing 001 have been done 5873 SD Card Appli Move 001 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1 002 Undo Exec This SP copies back the application programs from an SD c...

Page 1041: ...Type A or C SC codes 002 Reboot Type CTL Selects the reboot method for SC 0 or 1 0 0 Manual reboot 1 Automatic reboot 5878 Option Setup 001 Data Overwrite Security Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit Press EXECUTE on the operation panel Then turn the machine off and on 002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit 5881 Fixed Phrase Block Erasing 001 Deletes the fixed phrase 5885 WIM Set...

Page 1042: ...ocument Server List Def Lines CTL Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list 5 to 20 10 1 100 Signature Setting CTL Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when they are transmitted by an e mail 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 Setting for each e mail 1 Signature for all 2 No signature 101 Set Encryption CTL Determines whether the scanned documents ...

Page 1043: ...can be updated 001 CTL This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot The operation stores The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER The file is saved as a text file txt prefixed with the number of the machine 1 Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 lower slot 2 Select SP5887 then touch EXECUTE 3 Touch Execute in the...

Page 1044: ...mpleted the beeper sounds five times 5913 Switchover Permission Time 002 Print Application Timer CTL 3 to 30 3 1 second step Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode and the operation panel keys have not been used before another application can gain control of the display 5967 Copy Server Set Function CTL 0 ON 1 OFF Enables and disables the document server This is a s...

Page 1045: ...LDAP NT authentication Other network applications than NRS or LDAP NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to 2 Even though you can change the initial settings of those network applications the settings do not work 002 On Board USB 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Enable 5987 Mech Counter 001 0 OFF 1 ON This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 ...

Page 1046: ...008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK J Summary 025 SDK J Application Info 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 300 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1047: ...argin at the original trailing edge 007 Trailing Edge Erase ENG 10 to 10 0 0 1 mm step 6007 ADF INPUT Check Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF Only Bit 0 is used for ADF input check see Input Check in this section 6008 ADF OUTPUT Check Activates the electrical components for functional check It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same tim...

Page 1048: ...and the sides of the stack Value Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack 005 B5T ENG 008 LG T ENG 009 LT T ENG 012 Other ENG 6137 Finisher Free Run Execute the finisher free run 001 Free Run 1 ENG 0 to 1 0 1 step 002 Free Run 2 003 Free Run 3 004 Free Run 4 6145 FIN BLO INPUT Check Finisher Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of t...

Page 1049: ...ed on the screen but can be seen on the SMC logging outputs 001 Latest CTL 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 7404 SC991 History Logs the SC Code 991 detected The 10 most recently detected SC Code 991 are not displayed on the screen but can be seen on the SMC logging outputs System SP7 xxx 303 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1050: ...r of jams detected 001 CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams 001 Original Jam Counter CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 original step 7504 Paper Jam Location ON On check OFF Off Check Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 304 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1051: ...port Sn1 ON CTL 012 Vertical Transport Sn2 ON CTL 013 Vertical Transport Sn3 ON CTL 014 Vertical Transport Sn4 ON CTL 017 Registration Sensor ON CTL 018 Fusing Entrance ON CTL 019 Fusing Exit ON CTL 020 Paper Exit ON CTL 021 1bin Exit Sensor ON CTL 025 Duplex Exit ON CTL 026 Duplex Entrance ON In CTL 027 Duplex Entrance ON Out CTL System SP7 xxx 305 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1052: ...tical Transport Sn1 OFF CTL 052 Vertical Transport Sn2 OFF CTL 053 Vertical Transport Sn3 OFF CTL 054 Vertical Transport Sn4 OFF CTL 057 Registration Sensor OFF CTL 060 Paper Exit OFF CTL 061 1bin Exit Sensor OFF CTL 065 Duplex Exit OFF CTL 066 Duplex Entrance OFF In CTL 067 Duplex Entrance OFF Out CTL 068 Inverter Sensor OFF In CTL 069 Inverter Sensor OFF Out CTL 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 306 3 C...

Page 1053: ...r Stapler Motor CTL 249 Finisher Pick up Solenoid CTL 250 Data Error CTL 7505 ARDF Paper Jam Location ON On check OFF Off Check Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected 001 At Power On CTL For details Jam Detection in main chapter 004 Registration Sensor ON CTL 008 Registration Sensor OFF CTL 054 Inverter Sensor ON CTL 058 Inverter Sensor OFF CTL 7506 Jam Coun...

Page 1054: ...am History Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams 001 Latest CTL 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 7508 Original Jam History Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 308 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1055: ...st 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 7624 Part Replacement Operation ON OFF Selects the PM maintenance for each part System SP7 xxx 309 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1056: ...nit 014 Belt Cleaning Unit 015 Fusing Unit 016 PTR Unit 017 Waste Toner Bottle 018 Fusing Roller 019 Fusing Belt 7801 ROM No Firmware Version DisplaystheROMversionnumbersofthemainmachineandconnectedperipheraldevices 255 Displays all versions and ROM numbers in the machine 7803 PM Counter Display Page Unit Color 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 310 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1057: ...ed to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 1 to 21 and is reset to 0 The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 1 to 19 001 Paper 002 Page PCU Bk 003 Page PCU C 004 Page PCU M 005 Page PCU Y 006 Page Development Unit Bk 007 Page Development Unit C 008 Page Development Unit M 009 Page Development Unit Y 014 Page Image Transfer 015 Page Image Transfer Clean...

Page 1058: ...placed can be checked with SP7 906 31 to 49 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034 Rotation PCU Y 035 Rotation Development Unit Bk 036 Rotation Development Unit C 037 Rotation Development Unit M 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 043 Rotation Image Transfer 044 Rotation Image Transfer Cleaning 045 Rotation Fusing Unit 046 Rotation Fusing Roller 047 Rotation Fusing Belt 048 Rota...

Page 1059: ...d condition even though the R counter is still less than 100 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y 065 Rotation Development Unit Bk 066 Rotation Development Unit C 067 Rotation Development Unit M 068 Rotation Development Unit Y 073 Rotation Image Transfer 074 Rotation Image Transfer Cleaning 075 Rotation Fusing Unit 076 Rotation Fusing Roller 077 Rotation Fus...

Page 1060: ...1 Page PCU Bk ENG 0 to 255 1 step 092 Page PCU C 093 Page PCU M 094 Page PCU Y 095 Page Development Unit Bk 096 Page Development Unit C 097 Page Development Unit M 098 Page Development Unit Y 103 Page Image Transfer ENG 0 to 255 1 step 104 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 105 Page Fusing Unit 106 Page Fusing Roller 107 Page Fusing Belt 108 Page PTR Unit 7804 PM Counter Reset Unit Color Clears the PM c...

Page 1061: ...oper All 017 Image Transfer Belt 018 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit 019 Fusing Unit 020 Fusing Roller 021 Fusing Belt 022 PTR Unit 023 Toner Collection Bottle 100 All 7807 SC Jam Counter Reset Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams 001 CTL 7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only 001 Error Total 002 Error Staple System SP7 xxx 315 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1062: ...k Counter Counts the number of occurrences 0 to 65 535 when dust was detected on the scanning glass of the ARDF or resets the dust detection counter Counting is done only if SP4 020 1 ARDF Scan Glass Dust Check is switched on 001 Dust Detection Counter CTL 0 to 9999 1 step 002 Dust Detection Clear Counter CTL 0 to 9999 1 step 7853 Replacement Counter Displays the PM parts replacement number 001 PC...

Page 1063: ...e are three coverage counters Color 1 Color 2 and Color 3 A 5 default is adjustable with SP7855 001 B 20 default is adjustable with SP7855 002 The setting value B must be set larger than A The total numbers of printouts BW printing plus color printing for each coverage range are displayed with the following SPs Color1 counter SP8601 021 Color2 counter SP8601 022 Color3 counter SP8601 023 001 Cover...

Page 1064: ...r of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units 0 to 9999999 0 1 page step 001 Page PCU Bk 002 Page PCU C 003 Page PCU M 004 Page PCU Y 005 Page Development Unit Bk 006 Page Development Unit C 007 Page Development Unit M 008 Page Development Unit Y 013 Page Image Transfer 014 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 019...

Page 1065: ... Image Transfer 044 Rotation Image Transfer Cleaning 045 Rotation Fusing Unit 046 Rotation Fusing Roller 047 Rotation Fusing Belt 048 Rotation PTR Unit 049 Measurement Toner Collection Bottle 061 to 079 Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge 0 to 255 0 1 step 061 Rotation PCU Bk 062 Rotation PCU C 063 Rotation PCU M 064 Rotation PCU Y 065 Rotati...

Page 1066: ...t 100 where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part and Yield count is the recommended yield 0 to 255 0 1 step 091 Page PCU Bk 092 Page PCU C 093 Page PCU M 094 Page PCU Y 095 Page Development Unit Bk 096 Page Development Unit C 097 Page Development Unit M 098 Page Development Unit Y 103 Page Image Transfer 104 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 105 Page Fusing Unit 106 Page Fusi...

Page 1067: ...n ENG 009 Recycle Counter ENG 010 Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7932 Toner Bottle C Displays the toner bottle information for C System SP7 xxx 321 3 CÓPIA N...

Page 1068: ...ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7933 Toner Bottle M Displays the toner bottle information for M 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 322 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONT...

Page 1069: ... Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7934 Toner Bottle Y Displays the toner bottle information for Y System SP7 xxx 323 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLAD...

Page 1070: ...unter ENG 010 Date ENG 011 Serial No ENG 012 Toner Remaining ENG 013 EDP Code ENG 014 End History ENG 015 Refill Information ENG 016 Attachment Total Counter ENG 017 Attachment Color Counter ENG 018 End Total Counter ENG 019 End Color Counter ENG 020 Attachment Date ENG 021 End Date ENG 7935 Toner Bottle Log 1 Bk 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 324 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1071: ...Date 011 Attachment Total Counter 012 Refill Information 013 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Bk 014 Attachment Date 015 Attachment Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Bk 018 Attachment Date 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7936 Toner Bottle Log 1 C 001 Serial No ENG Displays the tone...

Page 1072: ...15 Attachment Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for M 018 Attachment Date 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7937 Toner Bottle Log 1 M 001 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for C 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle...

Page 1073: ...Date 019 Attachment Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7938 Toner Bottle Log 1 Y 001 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Y 002 Attachment Date 003 Attachment Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Y 006 Attachment Date 007 Attachment Total Counter 008 Refill Information 009 Serial No ENG Displays the toner ...

Page 1074: ...ll Information 7950 Unit Replacement Date Displays the replacement date of each PM unit 001 Image Transfer Belt ENG 002 Image Transfer Cleaning ENG 003 PTR Unit ENG 004 Fusing Unit ENG 005 Fusing Roller ENG 006 Fusing Belt ENG 013 PCU Bk ENG 014 PCU C ENG 015 PCU M ENG 016 PCU Y ENG 017 Development Unit Bk ENG 018 Development Unit C ENG 019 Development Unit M ENG 020 Development Unit Y ENG 3 Appen...

Page 1075: ...velopment Unit Y 013 Page Image Transfer Belt 014 Page Image Transfer Cleaning 015 Page Fusing Unit 016 Page Fusing Roller 017 Page Fusing Belt 018 Page PTR Unit 031 Rotation PCU Bk 032 Rotation PCU C 033 Rotation PCU M 034 Rotation PCU Y 035 Rotation Development Unit Bk 036 Rotation Development Unit C 037 Rotation Development Unit M 038 Rotation Development Unit Y 043 Rotation Image Transfer Belt...

Page 1076: ...9999 253311000 1000 mm step 004 Rotation Fusing Roller ENG 005 Rotation Fusing Belt ENG 006 Rotation Paper Transfer Unit ENG 0 to 999999999 150522000 1000 mm step 007 Measurement Tone Collection Bottle ENG 0 to 999999999 300000 1000 mg step 011 Page Image Transfer Belt ENG 0 to 999999 240000 1000 sheet step 012 Page Image Transfer Cleaning ENG 0 to 999999 180000 1000 sheet step 013 Page Fusing Uni...

Page 1077: ...thresholddayofthenearendforeach PM unit 1 to 30 15 1 day step These threshold days are used for Remote alarms 026 Day Threshold Development Unit C ENG 027 Day Threshold Development Unit M ENG 028 Day Threshold Development Unit Y ENG 033 Day Threshold Image Transfer Belt ENG 034 Day Threshold Image Transfer Cleaning ENG 035 Day Threshold Fusing Unit ENG 036 Day Threshold Fusing Roller ENG 037 Day T...

Page 1078: ...3 Page PCU Y 054 Page Development Unit Bk ENG 055 Page Development Unit C ENG 056 Page Development Unit M ENG 057 Page Development Unit Y ENG 062 Day Threshold PTR Unit ENG Adjuststhethresholddayofthenearendforeach PM unit 1 to 30 15 1 day step These threshold days are used for Remote alarms 063 Day Thresh Toner Collection Bottle 7953 Operation Env Log PCU Bk Displays the PCU rotation distance in ...

Page 1079: ... 0 H 30 010 15 T 25 30 H 55 011 15 T 25 55 H 80 ENG 0 to 99999999 1 mm step 012 15 T 25 80 H 100 013 25 T 30 0 H 30 014 25 T 30 30 H 55 015 25 T 30 55 H 80 016 25 T 30 80 H 100 017 30 T 0 H 30 018 30 T 30 H 55 019 30 T 55 H 80 020 30 T 80 H 100 7954 Operation Env Log Clear Clears the operation environment log 001 System SP7 xxx 333 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1080: ... the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Service Table make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean Pre...

Page 1081: ...rs to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the na...

Page 1082: ...an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g border removal adding stamps page numbers etc K Black YMCK LS Local Storage Refers to the document server LSize Large paper Size Mag Magnification MC One color monochrome NRS New Remote Service which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely NRS is used over...

Page 1083: ...2 only This machine is under development and currently not available Rez Resolution SC Service Code Error SC code displayed Scn Scan Sim Simplex Simplex printing on 1 side S to Email Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow M...

Page 1084: ...n a fax is received to fax memory the F counter increments but the L counter does not the document server is not used A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F counter the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations If one transmission generates an error then the broadcast will not be counte...

Page 1085: ...nter increments When a network application sends data to the document server the O counter increments When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server the O counter increments When a fax is sent to the document server the F counter increments 8 021 T Pjob LS CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally 0 to 9999999 0 1 The ...

Page 1086: ...TL 8 037 O Pjob DesApl CTL When documents already stored on the document server are printed the count for the application that started the print job is incremented When the print job is started from a network application Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments 8 041 T TX Jobs LS CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later acc...

Page 1087: ...99 0 1 These SPs total the finishing methods The finishing method is specified by the application 8 062 C FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application 8 063 F FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application Note Finishing ...

Page 1088: ...umber of jobs started in Staple mode 8 06x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode If the machine is in staple mode the Staple counter also increments 8 06x 5 Z Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding Z fold 8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode When Punch is set for a print job the P counter increments See SP8 064 6 8 06x 7 Oth...

Page 1089: ...ow at the operation panel by the number of pages in the job 8 077 O Jobs PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs Web Image Monitor Palm 2 etc by size based on the number of pages in the job 8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages 8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages 8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages 8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pa...

Page 1090: ... 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent by fax directly on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 8 11x 1 B W 8 11x 2 Color These counters count jobs not pages This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application including documents stored on the document server If the mode is changed during the job the...

Page 1091: ...ck and white scanned and attached to e mail without storing the original on the document server 8 13x 1 B W 8 13x 2 Color 8 13x 3 ACS These counters count jobs not pages If the job is stored on the document server after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to b...

Page 1092: ...ring scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 8 151 T Deliv Jobs PC CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs coun...

Page 1093: ...is counted from when it is registered for sending not when it is sent 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identical counts 8 163 F PCFAX TX Jobs CTL This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier 8 171 T Deliv Jobs WSD CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS 0 to 9999999 0...

Page 1094: ...eets are copied but not stored the C count is 6 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages the L count is 6 8 201 T LSize Scan PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission are not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools di...

Page 1095: ...tthenumberofpagesfedthroughtheADFforfrontandbacksidescanning 8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side...

Page 1096: ...es or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is enabled In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3 8 241 T Scan PGS Org CTL 0 to 9999999...

Page 1097: ...es 8 24x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes 8 24x 5 Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes 8 24x 6 Normal Detail Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 7 Fine Super Fine Yes No Yes No No 8 24x 8 Binary Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 9 Grayscale Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 10 Color Yes No No Yes No 8 24x 11 Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches fr...

Page 1098: ...e number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 261 T Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 262 C Scan PGS ColCr CTL 8 265 S Scn PGS Color CTL 8 266 L Scn PGS ColCr CTL 8 26x 1 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation panel 8 26x 2 Color Era...

Page 1099: ...ese totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 8 303 F Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 8 305 S Scan PGS Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned ...

Page 1100: ...to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time SP8 311 and SP8 315 perform identical counts 8 31x 1 1200dpi 8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi 8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi 8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi 8 31x 5 199dpi Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted The Fax application does...

Page 1101: ...Blank pages inserted as document covers chapter title sheets and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode service summaries engine maintenance reports etc Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam 8 391 LSize PrtPGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count pages printed on paper si...

Page 1102: ...Ps count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application 8 424 P PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application 8 425 S PrtPGS Dup Comb CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number...

Page 1103: ...These counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes Booklet Magazine Original Pages Count Original Pages Count 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 ...

Page 1104: ...total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications 8 43x 1 Cover Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2 8 43x 2 Series Book The number of pages printed in series one side or printed as a book with booklet right left pagination 8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were appl...

Page 1105: ...thin the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 447 O PrtPGS Ppr Size CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other Standard 8 44x 255 Other Custom These counters do not distinguish betwee...

Page 1106: ... Ppr Type CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted Duringduplexprinting pagesprintedo...

Page 1107: ...cycled 8 46x 3 Special 8 46x 4 Thick 8 46x 5 Normal Back 8 46x 6 Thick Back 8 46x 7 OHP 8 46x 8 Other 8 471 PrtPGS Mag CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed 8 471 1 49 8 471 2 50 to 99 8 471 3 100 8 471 4 101 to 200 8 471 5 201 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an externa...

Page 1108: ...me results as this SP is limited to the Print application 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 491 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by each application 8 492 C PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 493 F PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 496 L PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 497 O PrtPGS Col Mode CTL 8 49x 1 B W 8 49x 2 Single Color 8 49x 3 Two Color 8 49x 4 Full Color 8 501 T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL These...

Page 1109: ... 5 R16 8 514 6 GL GL2 8 514 7 R55 8 514 8 RTIFF 8 514 9 PDF 8 514 10 PCL5e 5c 8 514 11 PCL XL 8 514 12 IPDL C 8 514 13 BM Links Japan Only 8 514 14 Other 8 514 15 IPDS SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are not counted 8 521 T PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the tot...

Page 1110: ...of pages printed by the Print application 8 525 S PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application 8 526 L PrtPGS FIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 52x 1 Sort 8 52x 2 Stack 8 52x 3 Staple 8 52x ...

Page 1111: ... 8 551 1 Perfect Bind 8 551 2 Ring Bind 8 552 C Prt Books FIN CTL Not used 8 552 1 Perfect Bind 8 552 2 Ring Bind 8 554 T FIN Books CTL Not used 8 554 1 Perfect Bind 8 554 2 Ring Bind 8 556 L Prt Books FIN CTL Not used 8 552 6 Perfect Bind 8 552 6 Ring Bind 8 581 T Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In additi...

Page 1112: ... Smaller 8 581 14 Full Color Print 8 581 15 Mono Color Print 8 581 16 Full Color GPC 8 581 17 Twin Colour Mode Print 8 581 18 Full Colour Print Twin 8 581 19 Mono Colour Print Twin 8 581 20 Full Colour Total CV 8 581 21 Mono Colour Total CV 8 581 22 Full Colour Print CV 8 582 C Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output 8 582 1...

Page 1113: ... 8 584 1 B W 8 584 2 Mono Color 8 584 3 Full Color 8 584 4 Single Color 8 584 5 Two Color 8 586 L Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output 8 582 1 B W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color 8 591 O Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the totals for A3 DLT paper use number of duplex pages printed and t...

Page 1114: ...erage Counter 2 8 601 23 Coverage Counter 3 8 617 SDK Apli Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion 8 617 1 SDK 1 8 617 2 SDK 2 8 617 3 SDK 3 8 617 4 SDK 4 8 617 5 SDK 5 8 617 6 SDK 6 8 621 Func Use Counter CTL 001 to 064 Function 001 to Function 064 8 631 T FAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent b...

Page 1115: ... 8 641 T IFAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using I Fax 8 643 F IFAX TX PGS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I Fax 8 64x 1 B W 8 64x 2 Color If a document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color At the ...

Page 1116: ...document is sent to each destination of the SMB FTP server Due to restrictions on some devices if Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to a large number of destinations the count may be divided and counted separately For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a to...

Page 1117: ...he PC through the copier to the destination When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting the pages are only counted once For example a 10 page fax is sent to location A and location B The counter goes up by 10 not 20 8 691 T TX PGS LS CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server The counter for the application that was used to store the pages is ...

Page 1118: ...701 1 PSTN 1 8 701 2 PSTN 2 8 701 3 PSTN 3 8 701 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 701 5 Network 8 711 T Scan PGS Comp CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 715 S Scan PGS Comp CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode 8 715 1 JPEG JPEG2000 8 715 2 TIFF Multi Single 8 715 3 PDF 8 715 4 Other 8 715 5 PDF Comp 8 721 T Deliv PGS WSD CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 725 S Deliv PGS WSD CTL These SPs ...

Page 1119: ...N 2 8 741 3 PSTN 3 8 741 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 741 5 Network 8 771 Dev Counter CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners 8 771 1 Total 8 771 2 K 8 771 3 Y 8 771 4 M 8 771 5 C 8 781 Toner_Bottle_Info ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles NOTE Currently thedatainSP7 ...

Page 1120: ...at any time Note This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply 1 steps is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 10 steps 8 801 1 K 8 801 2 Y 8 801 3 M 8 801 4 C 8 851 CVr Cnt 0 10 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0 to 10 8 851 11 0 to 2 BK 8 851 31 5 to 7 BK 8 851 1...

Page 1121: ...ber of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 8 871 1 BK 8 871 2 Y 8 871 3 M 8 871 4 C 8 881 CVr Cnt 31 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31 or higher 8 881 1 BK 8 881 2 Y 8 881 3 M 8 881 4 C 8 891 Page Toner Bottle ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner f...

Page 1122: ...Y 8 901 3 M 8 901 4 C 8 911 Page Toner_Prev2 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color 8 911 1 BK 8 911 2 Y 8 911 3 M 8 911 4 C 8 921 Cvr Cnt Total CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 376 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1123: ...ot operating Includes time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes 8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing 8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Includes time while machine is performing background printing 8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machi...

Page 1124: ...registrations for relay TX 8 951 6 F Code F Code box registrations 8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feature 0 to 255 0 255 8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 10 Scanner Program Scanner application...

Page 1125: ...ax Print BW 8 999 11 Fax Print Single Color 8 999 12 A3 DLT 8 999 13 Duplex 8 999 14 Coverage Color 8 999 15 Coverage BW 8 999 16 Coverage Color Print Page 8 999 17 Coverage BW Print Page 8 999 101 Transmission Total Color 8 999 102 Transmission Total BW 8 999 103 FAX Transmission 8 999 104 Scanner Transmission Color 8 999 105 Scanner Transmission BW System SP8 xxx 379 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA...

Page 1126: ...remaining 5803 5 1 Tray Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 6 Bypass Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining 5803 7 Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 8 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 9 Paper Exit Full Sensor Paper not full Paper full 5803 10 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 5803 11 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper de...

Page 1127: ... 2 Front door open Front door closed 5803 26 Right Door Sensor Closed Open 5803 30 Duplex Cover Sensor Closed Open 5803 31 LDU Shutter Sensor Closed Open 5803 32 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Set Not set 5803 33 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Not full Full 5803 34 ITB Unit New Not new New 5803 35 Fusing Fan Lock Normal Lock 5803 36 Fusing Fan 1 Lock Normal Lock 5803 37 Fusing Fan 2 Lock Normal Loc...

Page 1128: ...803 58 Fusing New New Not new 5803 59 Fusing Destination Set Not set 5803 60 Fusing Set Set Not set 5803 61 Zero cross Signal Not detected Detected 5803 62 Fusing Temperature Detected Not detected 5803 63 1 Bin Set Set Not set 5803 64 1 Bin Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 65 1 Bin Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 66 Side Tray Set Set Not set 5803 67 Upper Cove...

Page 1129: ...ected Paper not detected 5803 83 Bank Cover Sensor 1 5803 84 Bank Cover Sensor 2 5803 94 GAVD Open Close Detection 5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP 5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close Table 1 Paper Size Switch Tray 1 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Paper size sensor North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 A4 A4 0 1 1 LT LT 1 1 1 Exe Exe 1 1 0 HLT A5 0 0 0 A6 1 ...

Page 1130: ...le 3 Paper Size Switch Tray 3 and 4 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Paper size sensor North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 LG LG 0 0 0 A4 A4 0 1 1 HLT A5 0 1 0 LT LT 1 1 1 Exe Exe 1 1 0 A6 A6 0 0 1 B6 B5 B6 B5 1 0 0 ARDF 6007 Description Reading 0 1 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 384 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1131: ...nsor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 5 Gathering Roller Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 6 Exit Guide Plate Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 8 Shift Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 9 Shift Tray Full Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6145 10 Stapler HP Sensor Paper not ...

Page 1132: ...182mm s 5804 19 Development Motor CMY 85mm s 5804 24 Drum Motor CMY 260mm s 5804 25 Drum Motor CMY 182mm s 5804 26 Drum Motor CMY 85mm s 5804 31 Feed Motor 364mm s 5804 32 Feed Motor 260mm s 5804 33 Feed Motor 182mm s 5804 34 Feed Motor 85mm s 5804 39 Registration Motor 260mm s 5804 40 Registration Motor 182mm s 5804 41 Registration Motor 85mm s 5804 46 Inverter Motor CW 468mm s 5804 47 Inverter M...

Page 1133: ... CCW 182mm s 5804 72 Duplex Motor CCW 85mm s 5804 77 Vertical Feed Motor 364mm s 5804 78 Vertical Feed Motor 260mm s 5804 79 Vertical Feed Motor 182mm s 5804 80 Vertical Feed Motor 85mm s 5804 83 Transfer Belt Contact Motor CW 5804 84 Transfer Belt Contact Motor CCW 5804 85 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Motor CW 5804 86 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Motor CCW 5804 87 Toner Collection Motor CW 5804...

Page 1134: ...105 Polygon Motor Middle Speed 5804 106 Polygon Motor Low Speed 5804 107 Fusing Fan 2 H 5804 108 Fusing Fan 2 L 5804 109 Fusing Front Fan H 5804 110 Fusing Front Fan L 5804 111 Toner Supply Fan 5804 112 Drive Unit Fan 5804 113 Development Fan 1 5804 114 Development Fan 2 5804 115 Development Fan 5804 116 Laser Unit Fan 5804 117 Feed Fan 5804 118 PSU Fan 5804 120 Development Clutch 5804 121 By pass...

Page 1135: ...elopment M 5804 136 PP Development C 5804 137 PP Development K 5804 138 PP D 5804 139 PP T1 Y 5804 140 PP T1 M 5804 141 PP T1 C 5804 142 PP T1 K 5804 143 PP T2 5804 144 PP T2 5804 147 PP Charge AC Y 260mm s 5804 148 PP Charge AC Y 182mm s 5804 149 PP Charge AC Y 85mm s 5804 154 PP Charge AC M 260mm s 5804 155 PP Charge AC M 182mm s 5804 156 PP Charge AC M 85mm s 5804 161 PP Charge AC C 260mm s Inp...

Page 1136: ...TM P Sensor Front Y 5804 186 P Sensor M 5804 187 TM P Sensor Center C 5804 188 TM P Sensor Rear K 5804 189 PCL FC 5804 190 PCL BK 5804 191 Toner End Sensor 5V CTL 5804 192 RFID ON OFF K 5804 193 RFID ON OFF C 5804 194 RFID ON OFF M 5804 195 RFID ON OFF Y 5804 196 RFID COM ON K 5804 197 RFID COM ON C 5804 198 RFID COM ON M 5804 199 RFID COM ON Y 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 216 LD1 K 3 Appendix SP Mo...

Page 1137: ...otor 2 364mm s 5804 230 Bank Motor 2 260mm s 5804 231 Bank Motor 2 182mm s 5804 232 Bank Motor 2 136mm s 5804 233 Bank Motor 2 85mm s 5804 234 Bank Motor 3 364mm s 5804 235 Bank Motor 3 260mm s 5804 236 Bank Motor 3 182mm s 5804 237 Bank Motor 3 136mm s 5804 238 Bank Motor 3 85mm s 5804 239 Bank Feed Clutch 1 5804 240 Bank Feed Clutch 2 5804 241 Bank Feed Clutch 3 5804 242 Bank Pick up Solenoid 1 ...

Page 1138: ...eed Clutch 6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid Internal Finisher 6146 Display Description 6146 001 Carry Motor Transport Motor 6146 002 Exit Motor 6146 003 Jogger Motor 6146 004 Sft Motor Shift Roller Motor 6146 005 Hitroll Motor Gathering Roller Motor 6146 006 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6146 007 Tray Motor Tray Lift Motor 6146 008 Staple Motor 6146 009 Stopper Solenoid Pick up Solenoid 3 Appendix SP Mode ...

Page 1139: ...ill have no effect I O Timeouts will never occur bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 RPCS PCL Printable area frame border 0 Disable 1 Enable Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area 1001 Bit Switch Printer Service Mode 393 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1140: ...5 0 is enabled this BitSwitch has no effect bit 3 PCL5e c PS PDL Auto Switching 0 Enable 1 Disable Disable The machine ability to change the PDL processor mid job Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e c If Auto PDL switching is disabled these jobs will not be printed properly bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 394 3 CÓPIA NÃO CO...

Page 1141: ... Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 005 Bit Switch 5 0 1 bit 0 Show Collate Type Staple Type and Punch Type buttons on the operation panel 0 Disable 1 Enable If enabled users will be able to configure a Collate Type Staple Type and Punch Type from the operation panel The available Types will depend on the device and configured options After enabling this BitSw the settings will appear...

Page 1142: ...SDK applications on data bit 3 PS PS Criteria 0 Pattern3 1 Pattern1 Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is PS data or not Pattern3 includes most PS commands Pattern1 A small number of PS tags and headers bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 jobs 0 Disable 100 1 Enable 1000 Enable Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stor...

Page 1143: ...s pages specified as Letterhead paper 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 0 1 bit 0 Print path 0 Disable 1 Enable If enabled simplex pages in mixed simplex duplex PS PCL5 jobs only and the last page of an odd paged duplex job PS PCL5 PCL6 are always routed through the duplex unit Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly bit 1 to 7 DFU 10...

Page 1144: ... timeout of jobs submitted via USB or Parallel Port IEEE 1284 0 Disable Immediatel y 1 Enable 10 seconds To be used if PDL auto detection fails A failure of PDL auto detection does not necessarily mean that the job cannot be printed This bit switch tells the device whether to time out immediately default upon failure or to wait 10 seconds bit 1 DFU bit 2 DFU bit 3 to 7 DFU 1003 Clear Setting 1003 ...

Page 1145: ...001 Factory Recalls a set of gamma settings This can be either a the factory setting b the previous setting or c the current setting 1101 002 Previous 1101 003 Current 1101 004 ACC 1102 Resolution Setting Selects the printing mode resolution for the printer gamma adjustment 1102 001 2400x600 Photo 1800x600 Photo 600 x 600 Photo 2400x600 Text 1800x600 Text 600x600 Text 1103 Test Page Prints the tes...

Page 1146: ... Shadow 1104 063 Yellow Middle 1104 064 Yellow IDmax 1105 Save Tone Control Value Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj menu item as the current setting Before the machine stores the new current setting it moves the data currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage location 1105 001 Save Tone Control Value 1106 Toner Limit Value Adjusts the maximum to...

Page 1147: ...1110 Media Print Support Enable or disable the media print support function 1110 001 0 to 1 1 1 step Printer Service Mode 401 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1148: ...e has scanned the edge of the original create a margin This SP is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning 1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm CTL 0 to 5 0 1 mm step 1009 Remote scan disable CTL 0 or 1 0 0 enable 1 disable 1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan 1010 Non Display Clear Light PDF CTL 0 or 1 0 0 Display 1 No display 1010 1 Enable or disable remote scan 1011 Org Count Display CTL 0 or...

Page 1149: ...inserted into this unit This SP must be enabled set to 1 in order for the device to function SP2 XXX Scanning image quality 2021 Compression Level Gray scale Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode JPEG for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2021 1 Comp1 5 95 CTL 5 to 95 20 1 step 2021 2 Comp2 5 95 5 to 95 40 1 step 2021 3 Comp3 5 95 5 to 95 65 1 ste...

Page 1150: ... of ClearLight PDF JPEG2000 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF JPEG2000 for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2025 1 Compression Ratio Normal CTL 5 to 95 25 1 step 2025 2 Compression Ratio High 5 to 95 20 1 step 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 404 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Page 1151: ...d to 0 does not come up on a test pattern 5 When you are prompted to confirm your selection touch Yes to select the test pattern for printing 6 Touch Copy Window to open the copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc If you want to use black and white printing touch Black White on the LCD If you want to use color printing touch Full Colour on the LCD 7 Press the Start k...

Page 1152: ...19 Checker Flag Pattern 8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale Vertical Margin 9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 10 Argyle Pattern Large 22 Two Beam Density Pattern 11 Independent Pattern 1 dot 23 Full Dot Pattern 3 Appendix SP Mode Tables 406 3 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for M022

Reviews:

Related manuals for M022

Brands by name

Popular brands

Ricoh M022, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for M022

Reviews:

Related manuals for M022

Brands by name

Popular brands